JP5533996B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, a gaming ball is launched into a gaming area, and when a gaming ball is won at various winning holes in the gaming area, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. Further, for example, a symbol display device (pattern display device) made up of a liquid crystal display device or the like is installed in the center of the game area, and the symbols are variably displayed by the symbol display device. Specifically, for example, three symbol rows arranged in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction are provided as the symbol variation display, and the symbols are variably displayed for each symbol column. In this case, the symbol display by the symbol display device is started with the winning of the predetermined winning opening as a trigger, and then the symbol variation display is stopped through the variation display and the effect display by the predetermined variation pattern. When a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a stopped state, for example, the game moves to a hit state and a large amount of game balls are paid out (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

  Here, in order to increase the degree of attention to the effect, it is preferable to enlarge the display area in which the effect is performed, and a configuration that can suitably increase the size of the display area is required.

  Note that the above problems are not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but also occur in other gaming machines equipped with a symbol display device.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably realizing an increase in display area.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 has a display surface, a display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction, and a display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Display means capable of differentiating,
Reflection means having a reflection surface capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
It has a position changing means for changing the position of at least one of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the change range by the position changing means includes a plurality of predetermined display positions. Holding means for holding the display means and the reflecting means at each of the positions;
With
As the plurality of display positions, a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected on the reflective surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. The reflective surface is in an inclined state, and a display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and a display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface. At least a special display position is set in which at least one of the display surface and the reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both are visible from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine,
As the special display position, a first special display position and a second special display position in which the inclination angle of the display surface and the reflection surface in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine are different from each other are set,
The display surface and the reflection surface are both formed in a planar shape,
The holding means holds the display means and the reflecting means so that the angle of the reflecting surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle at both the first special display position and the second special display position. It is a thing to do.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably realize a large display area.

The perspective view seen from the front which shows the structure of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a game machine main body. The front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The rear view which shows the structure of a game board. The perspective view of the game board seen from the front for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display unit. The perspective view of the game board seen from the back for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display unit. The rear view of the game board for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display unit. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state which looked at the symbol display unit from the side. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining an initial state of the symbol display unit, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an inclination state for jackpot of the symbol display unit, and (c) an explanation of a reach inclination state of the symbol display unit. Explanatory drawing for. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining an initial state of the symbol display unit, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an inclination state for jackpot of the symbol display unit, and (c) an explanation of a reach inclination state of the symbol display unit. Explanatory drawing for. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode in the initial state of the symbol display unit, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode in the big hit inclination state, (c) a display in the reach inclination state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an aspect. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a multi-view display visually recognizing from the predetermined position ahead of a pachinko machine. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the electrical structure in performing jackpot determination in a main controller. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process by CPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the start winning process by CPU of a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the normal process by CPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the 1st specific display part control processing by CPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the big hit state control processing by CPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the command input process by CPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the process for multi view display by CPU of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of video RAM of a display control apparatus, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of a liquid crystal display part drive by the image processing device of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the drawing process by VDP of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for normal display by VDP of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of drawing of the display data to video RAM, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of a display in the display area of a symbol display unit. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for the multi view display by VDP of a display control apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of drawing of the display data to video RAM, (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of a display in the display area of a symbol display unit. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the condition where special reach is not performed, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the condition where special reach is performed. (A) About the symbol display unit of 2nd Embodiment, explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the display in an initial state, (b) explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the display in the inclination state for jackpots, (c) ) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the display in the inclination state for reach. (A) About the symbol display unit of 3rd Embodiment, explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the display in an initial state, (b) explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the display in the state for jackpot, (c ) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the display in the inclination state for reach. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit in 4th Embodiment. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure regarding the setting of the state of a symbol display unit. The flowchart which shows the process for angle adjustments by CPU of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit in 5th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit in 6th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit in 7th Embodiment. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for normal display by VDP of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the drawing process for the multi view display by VDP of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in an initial state, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the inclination state for reach. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit in 8th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the AA line cross section. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of an initial state, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach inclination state. The flowchart which shows the process for multi view display by CPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the drawing process by VDP of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the condition where both 1st special reach and 2nd special reach are not performed, (b) The display content in the condition where 1st special reach is performed is demonstrated. (C) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the condition where the 2nd special reach is performed. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display apparatus in 9th Embodiment. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display apparatus in 10th Embodiment. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating another pattern of the angle between a display surface and a reflective surface. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of another symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of another symbol display unit. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of another symbol display apparatus.

  First, invention groups that can be extracted from the present embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Means 1. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
A state in which the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. In addition, both the display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and the display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected from the reflective surface are in front of the gaming machine. At a special display position (position in the reach inclination state or position in the big hit inclination state) in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine so as to be visible from a predetermined position Holding means (such as the display side support mechanism 83 and the reflection side support mechanism 85) for holding the display means and the reflection means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 1, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Note that the “holding” by the “holding means” is not limited as long as the display means and the reflecting means are held at the special display position, and both the display means and the reflecting means are kept in a state where no displacement occurs due to the external force. In addition to the above-described configuration, a configuration in which at least one of the display unit and the reflection unit is maintained in a state in which displacement with respect to an external force can occur is included. The same applies to the following.

  Mean 2. In the means 1, the special display position is such that the display surface and the reflection surface are positioned such that a side close to each other on the display surface and the reflection surface is positioned on the rear side of the gaming machine and a side far from each other is positioned on the front side of the gaming machine A gaming machine characterized in that both faces are in a position inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the means 2, at the special display position held by the holding means, both the display surface and the reflection surface are inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area, The display area can be increased in size favorably. That is, when the size of the space for providing the display area is the same, both the display surface and the reflective surface are compared with the configuration in which only one of the display surface and the reflective surface is tilted in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. By tilting the game machine in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, it is possible to secure a large total area of the display surface and the reflection surface.

Means 3. In the means 1 or 2, the display surface and the reflection surface are both formed in a planar shape,
The special display position is a position in which the angle of the reflection surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle.

  According to the means 3, at the special display position held by the holding means, the angle of the reflecting surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle. The display displayed on the reflection surface is visually recognized as being displayed on the same plane as the display surface. Thereby, the display in a display area can be performed favorably so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Means 4. In any one of the means 1 to 3, the special display position is such that no gap is formed between the display surface and the reflection surface when the display surface and the reflection surface are viewed from the predetermined position. A gaming machine characterized by a position that looks like this.

  According to the means 4, when the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is viewed from a predetermined position, the display area is not discontinuous at the boundary between the display surface and the reflection surface. As a result, the display in the display area can be integrated and performed well so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In particular, in the configuration provided with the means 3, the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is visually recognized as a flat shape and is continuously recognized as a continuous area. The display can be visually recognized as being displayed on the same display surface formed in the same size as the display area.

  As a more specific configuration of the means 4, the special display position is configured such that the edge of the reflective surface on the display surface side is on the display surface or a position close to the display surface. Can be considered.

  Further, in the present means 4, when the display surface and the reflection surface are viewed from the predetermined position in a situation where the display device and the reflection device are held at the special display position by the holding device, the display surface is displayed. The display means may be configured so as to perform a display in which a state in which a predetermined pattern straddles the boundary between the reflecting surface and the reflecting surface is visible. Further, in the present means 4, when the display surface and the reflection surface are viewed from the predetermined position in a situation where the display device and the reflection device are held at the special display position by the holding device, the display surface is displayed. The display means may be configured so that a display in which a state where a predetermined pattern passes through the boundary between the reflecting surface and the reflecting surface can be visually recognized. In these cases, in the configuration in which the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is continuous, it is possible to perform integral display in the display area.

  Further, in place of the configuration of the means 4, the special display position is such that, when the display surface and the reflection surface are viewed from the predetermined position, end portions on the display surface and the reflection surface are close to each other. A position that is separated and appears to have a separation space therebetween, and that does not block the light path between the display surface and the reflection surface when viewed from the predetermined position in the separation space. It is good also as a structure by which the decoration member was provided. In this case, the decorative member is provided in the middle portion of the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface while exhibiting the effects of the means 1 and the like, and a novel display effect using a single display means. Can be performed.

  Means 5. In any one of the means 1 to 4, the display means is formed so that the luminance of display visible from the second direction is higher than the luminance of display visible from the first direction. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Since the display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the player after being reflected by the reflective surface, the display on the reflective surface in the display area composed of the display surface and the reflective surface is displayed on the display surface. There is a concern that the brightness when viewed at a predetermined position is lowered. On the other hand, according to the means 5, the display means is formed so that the luminance of the display visible from the second direction is higher than the luminance of the display visible from the first direction. When viewed from a predetermined position, the display luminance on the reflection surface and the display luminance on the display surface can be made comparable. Therefore, the display in the display area can be favorably performed so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  As a specific configuration of this means, the display means defines the image display section for displaying an image on the display surface and the light emission direction from the display surface, whereby the first means In the configuration provided with the light defining means for differentiating the image visible from the second direction and the image visible from the second direction, the luminance is higher than the display luminance visible from the first direction. A configuration is possible in which the light defining means is provided so that the luminance of the display visible from the direction 2 is increased.

Means 6. In any one of the means 1 to 5, the display means has an image display part (liquid crystal display part 90 or the like) for displaying an image on the display surface,
In the image display unit, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 103 and the like) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 102 and the like) are set, and a second image is set between the first image areas. Display control means (display control device 82) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the image area is arranged and the first image area is arranged between the second image areas,
Furthermore, the display means defines a light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling the first image displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from the first direction. A gaming machine comprising light defining means (such as a parallax barrier panel 93) that allows a second image displayed in a plurality of second image areas to be viewed from the second direction.

  According to the means 6, it is possible to make the image when the display surface is viewed from the first direction different from the image when the display surface is viewed from the second direction.

  Mean 7 In the means 6, the display control means is configured to display the image for the second image region so that the second image is displayed on the display surface in an inverted state in a direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. A gaming machine comprising reverse control means (a function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the VDP 165) for setting information.

  The second image displayed on the display surface is reflected by the reflection surface, and is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. On the other hand, according to the means 7, the setting of the image information for the second image area is performed in a state in which the second image is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged, so that it is reflected on the reflection surface. Originally, the displayed image is in a state to be visually recognized by the player.

Means 8. Means 7 includes storage means (such as a character ROM 166) for preliminarily storing information on an image to be displayed on the image display unit.
The display control means sets information of an image stored in the storage means for the first image area and the second image area,
In the storage means, at least a part of the image information displayed in the first image area and the image information displayed in the second image area is shared,
The inversion control means, when setting the information of the shared image for the second image area, the information of the image is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged A gaming machine that is set up in

  According to the means 8, since the image information displayed in the first image area and the image information displayed in the second image area are at least partially shared, the image is displayed on the display surface. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of information. In the configuration, when the information on the common image is set for the second image area at the special display position held by the holding means, the information on the image is displayed on the display surface and the reflection surface. Since it is performed in the state of being reversed in the direction of the line, the image projected on the reflecting surface is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to satisfactorily display an image in a display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface while reducing the storage capacity of information for displaying the image on the display surface.

Means 9. In the means 7 or 8, the holding means includes position changing means (such as an angle changing motor 117 and guide grooves 139 and 140) for changing the positions of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the change by the position changing means. The range includes the special display position, and both an image displayed in the first image area and an image displayed in the second image area when viewed from the predetermined position. Non-special display positions (positions in the initial state) that can be visually recognized together on the display surface and at which reflection of images on the reflection surface is not performed are included, and in each of the special display position and the non-special display position The display means and the reflection means can be held,
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, the second image is inverted in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are aligned on the display surface. The image information for the second image area is set so that it is displayed in a state, and when the display unit and the reflection unit are held at the non-special display position, A gaming machine that does not perform the setting.

  According to the means 9, since the special display position and the non-special display position are set as the positions where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means, the size of the display area can be changed. In particular, in the special display position, the image displayed in the second image area is configured to be visible by being reflected on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, whereas non-special display. In the position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area are configured to be visible together on the display surface when viewed from a predetermined position. It is possible to set a large change width of the size of the display area at the special display position and the non-special display position.

  In this case, in the special display position, setting of image information for the second image region is performed so that the second image is displayed on the display surface in a state where the second image is reversed in the direction in which the display surface and the reflection surface are arranged. Thus, the image displayed on the reflection surface is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, at the non-special display position, image information is set for the second image area so that the second image is displayed on the display surface without being inverted, and is displayed on the display surface. The image is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, in the configuration in which the special display position and the non-special display position are set as described above, it is possible to display the image at each display position satisfactorily.

Means 10. In any one of the means 6 to 9, the image display unit is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions (unit pixel regions 101) vertically and horizontally,
The display control means is configured so that the first image region and the second image region are alternately arranged for each unit pixel region in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the image display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that display control of an image display unit is possible.

  According to the means 10, the distance between the first image areas adjacent to each other with the second image area interposed therebetween, and the distance between the second image areas adjacent to each other with the first image area interposed therebetween are set as the unit pixel area. It becomes possible to suppress. Thereby, in the structure which made it possible to make the image visually recognizable from the first direction different from the image recognizable from the second direction on the display surface, each image is spread over the same region on the display surface. While displaying each, it becomes possible to make the blank generated inside each image as inconspicuous as possible.

  Note that the first image area and the second image area are alternately arranged for each unit pixel area in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, so that the inside of each image. The effect of making the generated blank as inconspicuous as possible can be further enhanced, and the resolution can be increased in a pseudo manner as compared with the configuration in which the image areas are alternately arranged only in one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. It becomes possible.

  Means 11. In any one of the means 6 to 10, the light defining means is formed by providing a plurality of light shielding portions to a transparent panel formed to transmit light. .

  According to the means 11, the light defining means can be provided with a relatively simple configuration.

Means 12. In any one of the means 6 to 10, the light defining means is a light defining display means (parallax barrier liquid crystal display section 294) capable of displaying the light shielding part and the transmission part.
When display control is performed so that different images are displayed in the first image area and the second image area by the display control means, the first image area and the second image area correspond to the first image area and the second image area. A gaming machine comprising light regulation control means (display control device 82 and second image processing device 296) that causes the light shielding portion to be displayed on the light regulation display means.

  According to the means 12, when it is not necessary to display different images in the first image area and the second image area, the light-defining display means does not display the light-shielding part but displays only the transmissive part. The resolution of the image displayed on the display surface can be increased as necessary.

Means 13. In any one of the means 6 to 12, a storage means (character ROM 166 or the like) for storing in advance information on an image to be displayed on the image display unit is provided.
The display control means includes setting means (VDP 165 or the like) for setting image information stored in the storage means for the first image area and the second image area,
In the storage means, at least a part of image information displayed in the first image area and image information displayed in the second image area is shared.

  According to the means 13, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of information for displaying an image on the display surface while achieving the effect of the means 1.

  Means 14. In any one of the means 1 to 13, when the reflection surface is viewed from the predetermined position at the special display position, the reflection surface reflects the entire display surface or substantially the entire reflection surface. A gaming machine characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the means 14, the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface can be enlarged as much as possible, and it can be suppressed that other than the display on the display surface is displayed on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position. .

Means 15. In any one of the means 1 to 14, the display means can change the display when viewed from the third direction as well as the first direction and the second direction,
A reflection means having a reflection surface capable of reflecting the display on the display surface is provided separately from the reflection means,
In the special display position, at least in the state where each of the reflecting surfaces is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, one of the reflecting surfaces reflects a display visible from the second direction to reflect the first display. And the other reflecting surface reflects the display visible from the third direction so that the display is visible from the first direction. A gaming machine characterized in that the means and the reflecting means are positions held by the holding means.

  According to the means 15, at the special display position held by the holding means, the display surface is displayed on each reflecting surface, so that the display area can be enlarged.

Means 16. In any one of means 1 to 14, the display means displays on the display surface a display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and a display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. The first region (upper viewing angle adjustment region 244) that can be made different from the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the third direction are different. A second region (lower viewing angle adjustment region 245) that can be set,
A reflection means having a reflection surface capable of reflecting the display on the display surface is provided separately from the reflection means,
In the special display position, one of the reflective surfaces is disposed on the first region side of the display surface, and the other reflective surface is disposed on the second region side of the display surface, In a state where at least each of the reflecting surfaces is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, the one reflecting surface has an angle that reflects the display visible from the second direction and is visible from the first direction. In addition, the display means and each of the reflecting means hold the holding means so that the other reflecting surface reflects the display visible from the third direction and is visible from the first direction. A gaming machine characterized by being a position held by means.

  According to the means 16, at the special display position held by the holding means, the display surface is displayed on each reflecting surface, so that the display area can be enlarged.

  In particular, according to the present configuration, the display that is visible from the first direction, the display that is visible from the second direction, and the display that is visible from the third direction on the entire display surface are different. In addition, the display visible in the first direction in the first area of the display surface can be different from the display visible in the second direction, and the first direction in the second area of the display surface. By making it possible to make the display visible from the display different from the display visible from the third direction, it is possible to obtain the above effect while suppressing the resolution of each display from being lowered as much as possible.

Means 17. It has a display surface (display surface 94, etc.), and at least the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction can be different from the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Display means (symbol display device 81 and the like);
By having a reflective surface (reflective surface 131 etc.) and the reflective surface being inclined with respect to the display surface, the display visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflective surface, and Reflection means (such as the reflection unit 84) that is visible from the first direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 17, the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and different display can be performed on each of the display surface and the reflection surface. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In addition, by arranging the display means and the reflection means so that at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, a space for providing a display area can be provided in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or the left and right of the gaming machine. The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the direction, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. Compared to a configuration in which the display area is expanded in the direction and the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, when the display area is constituted by the display surface and the reflection surface, the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, so the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

Means 18. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
A state in which the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. In addition, at least one of the display surface and the reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both the display surface and the reflective surface are visible from the front of the gaming machine (for reach) Holding means (the display side support mechanism 83, the reflection side support mechanism 85, etc.) that holds the display means and the reflection means at a position in the inclined state or a position in the large hitting inclination state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 18, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

Means 19. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
A state in which the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. Further, both the display visible on the display surface from the first direction and the display visible on the display surface from the second direction and reflected on the reflective surface are the front part of the gaming machine. A special display position (in the reach inclined state) in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that the window can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Holding means (display-side support mechanism 83, reflection-side support mechanism 85, etc.) that holds the display means and the reflection means at a position or a position in the large hitting inclination state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 19, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, so a space for providing a display area is provided. Even if the display area is not expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged, and the space for providing the display area can be expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. As compared with a configuration in which the display area is simply expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is attached to the window panel. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is inclined to the back side, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the game machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

Means 20. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
A state in which the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. In addition, both the display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and the display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected from the reflective surface are in front of the gaming machine. At a special display position (position in the reach inclination state or position in the big hit inclination state) in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine so as to be visible from a predetermined position Holding means (such as the display side support mechanism 83 and the reflection side support mechanism 85) for holding the display means and the reflection means;
With
The special display position is a position where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means so that the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface. .

  According to the means 20, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface, for the player, in the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface. The influence of the left and right eye parallax on the display is reduced. That is, the angle of the line of sight in the horizontal direction when a predetermined part of the display area is visually recognized is different between the right eye and the left eye. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the display surface and the reflection surface are provided on the left and right, depending on the position of the player's viewpoint with respect to the display area, the viewing angle is directed toward the left side due to the difference in the line of sight between the left eye and the right eye. It is assumed that the set display is viewed with the left eye and the image with the viewing angle set to the right is viewed with the right eye. On the other hand, in the left eye and the right eye, the angle difference between the lines of sight in the vertical direction when viewing a predetermined part of the display area is generally small. Therefore, by arranging the reflective surface above or below the display surface as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as different display between the left eye and the right eye, and for the player to display the display area. The influence of the parallax of the left and right eyes on is reduced.

  Means 21. In the means 20, the special display position includes the display surface and the reflection surface so that the display surface and the reflection surface are located on the rear side of the gaming machine and the sides closer to each other are located on the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized in that one of the faces is in a state of being inclined upward toward the rear side of the gaming machine and the other is in a state of being inclined downward toward the rear side of the gaming machine.

  According to the means 21, at the special display position held by the holding means, both the display surface and the reflection surface are inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area, The display area can be increased in size favorably. That is, when the size of the space for providing the display area is the same, both the display surface and the reflective surface are compared with the configuration in which only one of the display surface and the reflective surface is tilted in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. By tilting the game machine in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, it is possible to secure a large total area of the display surface and the reflection surface.

  Means 22. In the means 21, the holding means holds the display means and the reflection means so that the reflection surface is disposed above the display surface.

  In game halls where gaming machines are installed, in-store lighting is provided on the ceiling. In this case, according to the means 22, since the reflection surface is arranged above the display surface, light from the in-store lighting is hardly reflected on the reflection surface at the special display position held by the holding means.

  Means 23. The gaming machine according to any one of the means 20 to 22, wherein a display content visible from the second direction is displayed or displayed in an inverted state on the display surface.

  In the configuration in which the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface at the special display position held by the holding means, the display content visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflection surface. It will be in the state upside down. On the other hand, according to the means 23, on the display surface, the display content visible from the second direction is displayed or displayed in an inverted state, so that the display displayed on the reflection surface is Originally, a state that should be visually recognized by the player is obtained.

Means 24. In any one of the means 20 to 22, the display means has an image display part (liquid crystal display part 90 or the like) for displaying an image on the display surface,
In the image display unit, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 103 and the like) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 102 and the like) are set, and a second image is set between the first image areas. Display control means (display control device 82) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the image area is arranged and the first image area is arranged between the second image areas,
Furthermore, the display means defines a light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling the first image displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from the first direction. Light regulation means (such as a parallax barrier panel 93) that allows the second image displayed in the plurality of second image areas to be viewed from the second direction;
The display control means performs reversal control means (step S1005 in the VDP 165) for setting image information for the second image area so that the second image is displayed upside down on the display surface. A game machine having a function of executing the process.

  According to the means 24, the image when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the image when the display surface is viewed from the second direction can be made different.

  In this case, in the configuration in which the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface at the special display position held by the holding unit, the second image displayed on the display surface is reflected by the reflection surface. It will be in the state turned upside down. On the other hand, according to this means, since the setting of the image information for the second image area is performed in a state where the second image is turned upside down, the second image is turned upside down on the display surface. Is displayed. Therefore, the image projected on the reflecting surface is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player.

Means 25. The means 24 includes storage means (such as a character ROM 166) for preliminarily storing image information to be displayed on the image display unit.
The display control means sets information of an image stored in the storage means for the first image area and the second image area,
In the storage means, at least a part of the image information displayed in the first image area and the image information displayed in the second image area is shared,
The inversion control means, when setting the information of the shared image for the second image area, performs setting in a state in which the information of the image is inverted upside down. A gaming machine.

  According to the means 25, since at least a part of the image information displayed in the first image area and the image information displayed in the second image area is shared, the image is displayed on the display surface. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of information. In the configuration, when the information on the common image is set for the second image area at the special display position held by the holding unit, the information on the image is turned upside down. For this reason, the image projected on the reflecting surface is originally in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. That is, it is possible to satisfactorily display an image in a display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface while reducing the storage capacity of information for displaying the image on the display surface.

Means 26. In the means 24 or 25, the holding means includes position changing means (such as an angle changing motor 117 and guide grooves 139 and 140) for changing the positions of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the change by the position changing means. The range includes the special display position, and both an image displayed in the first image area and an image displayed in the second image area when viewed from the predetermined position. Non-special display positions (positions in the initial state) that can be visually recognized together on the display surface and at which reflection of images on the reflection surface is not performed are included, and in each of the special display position and the non-special display position The display means and the reflection means can be held,
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, the inversion control means is configured to display the second image on the display surface in a vertically inverted state. When image information is set for a two-image area and the display means and the reflection means are held at the non-special display position, the setting in the upside down state is not performed. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the means 26, since the special display position and the non-special display position are set as the positions where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means, the size of the display area can be changed. In particular, in the special display position, the image displayed in the second image area is configured to be visible by being reflected on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, whereas non-special display. In the position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area are configured to be visible together on the display surface when viewed from a predetermined position. It is possible to set a large change width of the size of the display area at the special display position and the non-special display position.

  In this case, in the special display position, the image information is set for the second image area so that the second image is displayed in the vertically inverted state on the display surface, whereby the image displayed on the reflective surface is displayed. Will be in a state that should be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, at the non-special display position, the image information is set for the second image area so that the second image is not flipped upside down on the display surface. The image that is supposed to be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, in the configuration in which the special display position and the non-special display position are set as described above, it is possible to display the image at each display position satisfactorily.

Means 27. In the means 26, the image display unit is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions (unit pixel regions 101) vertically and horizontally,
The display control means is configured so that the first image region and the second image region are alternately arranged for each unit pixel region in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the image display unit. Display control of the image display unit,
Further, the display control means is configured to display the same image information for the first image area and the second image area when the display means and the reflection means are held at the non-special display position. A game machine comprising the same image setting means (function for executing the processing of step S902 in the VDP 165).

  According to the means 27, the distance between the first image areas adjacent to each other with the second image area interposed therebetween, and the distance between the second image areas adjacent to each other with the first image area interposed therebetween are set as the unit pixel area. It becomes possible to suppress. Thereby, it is possible to make the blank generated inside each image as inconspicuous as possible while displaying the first image and the second image over the entire same area on the display surface at the special display position.

  In this configuration, since the same image information is set for the first image area and the second image area at the non-special display position, the image information at the non-special display position is set for the first image area. It is not necessary to store the information and the information for the second image area separately, and the storage capacity of the information for displaying the image on the display surface can be reduced as compared with the configuration of storing the information separately. Can do.

  In the configuration in which the storage capacity is reduced as described above, the distance between the first image regions adjacent to each other with the second image region interposed therebetween and the second adjacent to each other with the first image region interposed therebetween as described above. The distance between the image areas is reduced to the unit pixel area. Therefore, even if the same image information is set for the first image region and the second image region, the image corresponding to the same image information is displayed as an integral image on the display surface. The image is displayed favorably at the non-special display position.

Means 28. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
A state in which the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. In addition, at least one of the display surface and the reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both the display surface and the reflective surface are visible from the front of the gaming machine (for reach) Holding means (the display side support mechanism 83, the reflection side support mechanism 85, etc.) that holds the display means and the reflection means at a position in the inclined state or a position in the large hitting inclination state);
With
The special display position is a position where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means so that the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface. .

  According to the means 28, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface, for the player, in the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface. The influence of the left and right eye parallax on the display is reduced. That is, the angle of the line of sight in the horizontal direction when a predetermined part of the display area is visually recognized is different between the right eye and the left eye. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the display surface and the reflection surface are provided on the left and right, depending on the position of the player's viewpoint with respect to the display area, the viewing angle is directed toward the left side due to the difference in the line of sight between the left eye and the right eye. It is assumed that the set display is viewed with the left eye and the image with the viewing angle set to the right is viewed with the right eye. On the other hand, in the left eye and the right eye, the angle difference between the lines of sight in the vertical direction when viewing a predetermined part of the display area is generally small. Therefore, by arranging the reflective surface above or below the display surface as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as different display between the left eye and the right eye, and for the player to display the display area. The influence of the parallax of the left and right eyes on is reduced.

Means 29. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
A state in which the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. Further, both the display visible on the display surface from the first direction and the display visible on the display surface from the second direction and reflected on the reflective surface are the front part of the gaming machine. A special display position (in the reach inclined state) in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that the window can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Holding means (display-side support mechanism 83, reflection-side support mechanism 85, etc.) that holds the display means and the reflection means at a position or a position in the large hitting inclination state);
With
The special display position is a position where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means so that the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface. .

  According to the means 29, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, so a space for providing a display area is provided. Even if the display area is not expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged, and the space for providing the display area can be expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. As compared with a configuration in which the display area is simply expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is attached to the window panel. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is inclined to the back side, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the game machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is arranged above or below the display surface, for the player, in the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface. The influence of the left and right eye parallax on the display is reduced. That is, the angle of the line of sight in the horizontal direction when a predetermined part of the display area is visually recognized is different between the right eye and the left eye. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the display surface and the reflection surface are provided on the left and right, depending on the position of the player's viewpoint with respect to the display area, the viewing angle is directed toward the left side due to the difference in the line of sight between the left eye and the right eye. It is assumed that the set display is viewed with the left eye and the image with the viewing angle set to the right is viewed with the right eye. On the other hand, in the left eye and the right eye, the angle difference between the lines of sight in the vertical direction when viewing a predetermined part of the display area is generally small. Therefore, by arranging the reflective surface above or below the display surface as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as different display between the left eye and the right eye, and for the player to display the display area. The influence of the parallax of the left and right eyes on is reduced.

  Note that any one of the characteristic configurations of the above-described means 2 to 16 may be applied to any one of the above-described means 20 to 29, and any one of the characteristic configurations of any of the means 30 to 76 described later. May be applied.

Means 30. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
Position changing means (angle changing motor 117, guide grooves 139, 140, etc.) for changing the position of at least one of the display surface and the reflecting surface is provided, and a plurality of predetermined change ranges by the position changing means are provided. And a holding means (such as the display side support mechanism 83 and the reflection side support mechanism 85) for holding the display means and the reflection means at each of the plurality of display positions;
With
As the plurality of display positions, a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected on the reflective surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. The display in which the reflective surface is inclined and is visible from the first direction on the display surface, and the display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected from the reflective surface; Special display position (position or jackpot in the reach tilt state) where at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is tilted in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both can be viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine A gaming machine characterized in that at least a position in an inclined state for use is set.

  According to the means 30, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, whereby the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of display positions including the special display position are set as positions where the display unit and the reflection unit are held by the holding unit, the display position can be changed as necessary. For example, by changing the display position according to the game situation, it becomes possible to perform display according to the game situation. In addition, for example, by making it possible to change the display position in accordance with the player's viewpoint, it is possible for the player to set a favorable state when viewing the display.

  Means 31. In the means 30, a non-special display position (a position in an initial state) at which an image is not reflected on the reflecting surface is set as the plurality of display positions.

  According to the means 31, as a position where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means, a special display position in which the display area is constituted by the display surface and the reflection surface, and a non-special display in which the display area is constituted by the display surface By setting the position, the size of the display area can be changed. For example, by changing the display position between the special display position and the non-special display position according to the game situation, the size of the display area according to the game situation can be changed.

Means 32. In the means 31, the special display position is a position where at least the display surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine,
The non-special display position is a position where the display surface faces the front of the gaming machine without tilting in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine or a side where the tilting of the gaming machine front-rear direction is closer to the front of the gaming machine than the special display position A gaming machine characterized by being a position.

  According to the means 32, not only the display area size is changed between the special display position and the non-special display position, but also the inclination angle of the display surface is changed. Can be big. In addition, in the non-special display position, the display surface faces the front of the gaming machine without tilting in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine, or the tilt in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine is on the side where the display surface faces the front of the gaming machine from the special display position By setting the position, it is possible to make the display in the display area easier to see at the non-special display position where the size of the display area is smaller than the special display position.

  In addition, instead of the configuration of the means 32, when the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, a window portion that allows both the display surface and the reflection surface to be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The special display position is a position where at least the display surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with respect to the window portion, and the non-special display position is the position where the display surface is the window portion. It is good also as a structure which is a position which becomes parallel or substantially parallel to.

Means 33. In the means 31 or 32, the display surface and the reflection surface are both formed in a planar shape,
The special display position is a position in which the angle of the reflection surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle.

  According to the means 33, the angle of the reflection surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle at the special display position, so that it is reflected on the reflection surface for the player from the relationship of the light path when the reflection surface is viewed. The displayed display is visually recognized as being displayed on the same plane as the display surface. Thereby, the display in the display area at the special display position can be favorably performed so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Further, when the display area is configured by the display surface at the non-special display position, the display in the display area can be visually recognized as being displayed on the same plane even at the special display position as described above. Thus, it is possible to unify the display appearance of the display area at both display positions other than the size and the angle of the display surface. Thereby, the display in the display area at the special display position can be favorably performed so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Means 34. In any one of the means 31 to 33, the special display position has no gap between the display surface and the reflection surface when the display surface and the reflection surface are viewed from the predetermined position. A gaming machine characterized by a position that looks like this.

  According to the means 34, when the display area at the special display position is viewed from a predetermined position, the display area does not become discontinuous at the boundary between the display surface and the reflection surface, and is continuous. The display in the display area can be integrated and performed well so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In addition, when the display area is constituted by the display surface at the non-special display position, the display area at both display positions can be viewed by making the display area continuous at the special display position as described above. Can be unified except for the size and the angle of the display surface. Thereby, the display in the display area at the special display position can be favorably performed so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

Means 35. In any one of the means 31 to 34, when the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, the window portion that allows both the display surface and the reflection surface to be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. (Opening 33a),
In the non-special display position, the holding means holds the reflecting means at a position where the entire reflection surface or substantially the entire reflection surface is not visible through the window or is difficult to see. .

  According to the means 35, at the non-special display position, the whole or substantially the entire reflection surface is not visible or difficult to see through the window in response to the reflection of the image on the reflection surface. It is possible to hide a reflection surface that is not required in the above. Assuming a configuration in which the reflective surface is visible through the window at the non-special display position, there is a possibility that something unrelated to the display on the display surface will be displayed on the reflective surface. Such inconvenience is suppressed.

Means 36. In means 35, the position changing means includes an angle changing means (an angle changing motor 117 or the like) for changing an inclination angle in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with respect to one of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the display surface and the reflecting surface. A connecting means (connecting member 142) for connecting the display means and the reflecting means on the sides close to each other, and the other of the display face and the reflecting face with respect to a change in the angle of the one face Follow-up means (guide grooves 139, 140, etc.) to follow,
Further, when the display unit and the reflection unit are held at the non-special display position, a part of the window part is formed so that the entire reflection surface is not visible or difficult to see through the window part. A gaming machine comprising shielding means (such as a shutter member 188) that shields the camera.

  According to the means 36, when the inclination angle of one of the display surface and the reflective surface is changed by the angle changing means, the other of the display surface and the reflective surface moves following it, The display position of the reflecting surface is changed in conjunction. Further, the number of members can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the angle changing means is provided for each of the display surface and the reflection surface.

  In this configuration, since the display means and the reflection means are connected by the connection means, the position of the reflection means cannot be moved independently of the display means. If an attempt is made to retract the reflective surface to a position where it is impossible to visually recognize or difficult to visually recognize through the screen, the size of the display surface or the reflective surface with respect to the window is limited. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present means, a shielding means is provided, and the shielding means provides a partial area of the window portion so that the entire reflecting surface is not visible or difficult to visually recognize through the window portion. Is shielded. As a result, the entire display surface can be made invisible or difficult to view through the window portion without retracting the reflecting surface to a position where it is not visible or difficult to see through the window portion in the non-special display position. The above restrictions do not occur.

Means 37. In any one of the means 31 to 36, the display means has an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 90 or the like) for displaying an image on the display surface,
In the image display unit, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 103 and the like) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 102 and the like) are set, and a second image is set between the first image areas. Display control means (display control device 82) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the image area is arranged and the first image area is arranged between the second image areas,
Furthermore, the display means defines the light emission direction from the display surface, thereby enabling the images displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from the first direction and the plurality of the plurality of first image areas. Light regulation means (such as a parallax barrier panel 93) that enables an image displayed in the second image area to be viewed from the second direction;
When the non-special display position is viewed from the predetermined position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area are visually recognized together on the display surface. Is a possible position,
The display control means includes
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, special display control means (in the VDP 165) displays different images in the first image area and the second image area. Drawing process for multi-view display),
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the non-special display position, the image displayed on the first image area and the image displayed on the second image area are displayed on the display surface. Non-special display control means for displaying images in the first image region and the second image region so that the same image is displayed (normal display rendering processing in the VDP 165);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 37, the image when the display surface is viewed from the first direction can be different from the image when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. An image can be displayed in a display area constituted by a reflective surface.

  In this case, in the special display position, the image displayed in the second image area is configured to be visible by being reflected on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined direction, whereas In the special display position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area can be viewed together on the display surface when viewed from a predetermined direction. Therefore, it is possible to set a large change width of the size of the display area at the special display position and the non-special display position. In the non-special display position, the same image is displayed on the display surface by the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area. The image can be displayed satisfactorily.

Means 38. In the means 37, the image display unit is configured by arranging a large number of unit pixel regions (unit pixel regions 101) vertically and horizontally,
The display control means is configured so that the first image region and the second image region are alternately arranged for each unit pixel region in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the image display unit. Display control of the image display unit,
Furthermore, the display control means for non-special display is provided for the first image area and the second image area when the display means and the reflection means are held at the non-special display position. A game machine characterized by setting information of the same image.

  According to the means 38, the distance between the first image areas adjacent to each other with the second image area interposed therebetween, and the distance between the second image areas adjacent to each other with the first image area interposed therebetween are set as the unit pixel area. It becomes possible to suppress. Thereby, in the special display position, the image displayed by the plurality of first image areas and the image displayed by the plurality of second image areas are respectively displayed over the same area on the display surface. It is possible to make the blank generated inside the image as inconspicuous as possible.

  In this configuration, since the same image information is set for the first image area and the second image area at the non-special display position, the image information at the non-special display position is set for the first image area. It is not necessary to store the information and the information for the second image area separately, and the storage capacity of the information for displaying the image on the display surface can be reduced as compared with the configuration of storing the information separately. Can do.

  In the configuration in which the storage capacity is reduced as described above, the distance between the first image regions adjacent to each other with the second image region interposed therebetween and the second adjacent to each other with the first image region interposed therebetween as described above. The distance between the image areas is reduced to the unit pixel area. Therefore, even if the same image information is set for the first image region and the second image region, the image corresponding to the same image information is displayed as an integral image on the display surface. The image is displayed favorably at the non-special display position.

Means 39. In the means 37 or 38, the light defining means is a light defining display means (parallax barrier liquid crystal display section 294) capable of displaying the light shielding portion and the transmissive portion.
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position, the light-defining display means displays the light-shielding portion in correspondence with the first image area and the second image area. In addition, when the display unit and the reflection unit are held at the non-special display position, the light regulation control unit (the display control device 82 and the light control unit) prevents the light shielding unit from being displayed on the light regulation display unit. A gaming machine comprising a second image processing device 296).

  According to the means 39, in the configuration in which the image when the display surface is viewed from the first direction at the special display position is different from the image when the display surface is viewed from the second direction, non-special At the display position, it is possible to display only the transmissive part without displaying the light shielding part on the light regulating display means, and the resolution of the image displayed on the display surface can be increased as compared with the case of the special display position. it can.

  Means 40. In any one of the means 30 to 39, as the special display position, a first special display position (position or the like in a big hit state) in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface has a different inclination angle in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. And a second special display position (position in the reach inclination state, etc.).

  According to the means 40, the state in which the display area is configured by the display surface and the reflection surface can be changed between the first special display position and the second special display position. Alternatively, it is possible to adjust the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine for at least one of the reflecting surfaces.

  Means 41. In any one of the means 30 to 39, as the special display position, a first special display position (position in a big hit state, etc.) and a second special display position (reach) having different inclination angles of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. And the like in a tilted state for use).

  According to the means 41, the state in which the display area is configured by the display surface and the reflection surface can be changed between the first special display position and the second special display position. It is possible to adjust the tilt angle in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

Means 42. In the means 41, the display surface and the reflection surface are both formed in a planar shape.
The holding means holds the display means and the reflecting means so that the angle of the reflecting surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle at both the first special display position and the second special display position. A gaming machine that is characterized by

  According to the means 42, the angle of the reflection surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle at the first special display position and the second special display position. For a person, the display displayed on the reflection surface is visually recognized as being displayed on the same plane as the display surface. Thereby, the display in the display area at the special display position can be favorably performed so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  Moreover, since the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface is held at a right angle or a substantially right angle at any of the first special display position and the second special display position, for example, a change in the size of the display area or a game machine with respect to the display surface When adjusting the tilt angle in the front-rear direction, it can be performed while maintaining the state of the display area as described above.

  Means 43. In the means 41 or 42, the holding means is configured to display the display surface when the display surface and the reflection surface are viewed from the predetermined position at any of the first special display position and the second special display position. And the reflecting means, the display means and the reflecting means are held so that no gap is formed between them.

  According to the means 43, when the display area is viewed from a predetermined position at the first special display position and the second special display position, the display area is discontinuous at the boundary between the display surface and the reflection surface. As a result, the display in the display area is integrated and can be performed well so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, since both the first special display position and the second special display position are configured so that there is no gap between the display surface and the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, for example, display When changing the size of the area or adjusting the tilt angle in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with respect to the display surface, it can be performed while maintaining the display area state as described above.

Means 44. In any one of the means 41 to 43, the position changing means includes an angle changing means (an angle changing motor 117 or the like) for changing an inclination angle in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with respect to one of the display surface and the reflecting surface; A connecting means (connecting member 142) for connecting each of the display means and the reflecting means which are close to each other on the display surface and the reflective surface; and the display surface and the change in the angle of the one surface And follow-up means (guide grooves 139, 140, etc.) for following the other of the reflecting surfaces,
The first special display position is a position where an inclination of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is a side where the display surface faces the front of the gaming machine from the second special display position,
The follow-up means moves the other of the display surface and the reflective surface so that the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface becomes a specific angle at any of the first special display position and the second special display position. To follow,
The reflective surface is formed so as to project the entire display surface or substantially the entire reflection surface when viewed from the predetermined position at the second special display position. A gaming machine.

  According to the means 44, when the inclination angle of one of the display surface and the reflective surface is changed by the angle changing means, the other of the display surface and the reflective surface moves following it, The display position of the reflecting surface is changed in conjunction. Further, the number of members can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the angle changing means is provided for each of the display surface and the reflection surface.

  In this case, the reflection surface is formed so as to project the entire display surface or the entire entirety of the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position at the second special display position. 2 In the special display position, the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface can be enlarged as much as possible, and it can be suppressed that other than the display on the display surface is displayed on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position. .

  Further, in this configuration, the first special display position is a position where the inclination of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is a side where the display surface faces the front side of the gaming machine from the second special display position. At either the display position or the second special display position, the other of the display surface and the reflective surface is followed so that the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface becomes a specific angle. Therefore, at the first special display position, when viewed from a predetermined position, a part of the display surface is displayed on the reflective surface, so that the screen other than the display on the display surface is projected on the reflective surface. Is maintained.

Means 45. In any one of the means 41 to 43, the position changing means includes an angle changing means (an angle changing motor 117 or the like) for changing an inclination angle in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with respect to one of the display surface and the reflecting surface; A connecting means (connecting member 142) for connecting each of the display means and the reflecting means which are close to each other on the display surface and the reflective surface; and the display surface and the change in the angle of the one surface And follow-up means (guide grooves 139, 140, etc.) for following the other of the reflecting surfaces,
The first special display position is a position where an inclination of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is a side where the display surface faces the front of the gaming machine from the second special display position,
The follow-up means moves the other of the display surface and the reflective surface so that the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface becomes a specific angle at any of the first special display position and the second special display position. To follow,
The reflective surface is formed so as to reflect the entire or substantially entire display surface in the entire or substantially entire reflective surface when viewed from the predetermined position in the first special display position;
When viewed from the predetermined position at the second special display position, a blank member (shielding plate 198) is provided so that the display surface of the reflection surface is reflected on the entire area of the reflection surface. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the means 45, when the inclination angle of one of the display surface and the reflective surface is changed by the angle changing means, the other of the display surface and the reflective surface moves following it, The display position of the reflecting surface is changed in conjunction. Further, the number of members can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the angle changing means is provided for each of the display surface and the reflection surface.

  In this case, the reflection surface is formed so as to project the entire display surface or substantially the entire reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position at the first special display position. At one special display position, the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is enlarged as much as possible, and when the image is viewed from a predetermined position, it is possible to prevent the reflection surface from displaying anything other than the display on the display surface. .

  Further, in this configuration, the first special display position is a position where the inclination of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is a side where the display surface faces the front side of the gaming machine from the second special display position. At either the display position or the second special display position, the other of the display surface and the reflective surface is followed so that the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface becomes a specific angle. Therefore, in the second special display position, the entire display surface is displayed on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, so that the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is enlarged as much as possible. Is maintained. However, in this configuration, something other than the display surface is projected on the reflecting surface. On the other hand, when viewed from a predetermined position at the second special display position, since the blank member is provided so that the display surface on the reflection surface is projected on the entire area, the inside of the gaming machine, etc. It is suppressed that the area which should not be projected on the reflecting surface is projected.

Means 46. In any one of the means 41 to 43, a game board (game board 33) having a game area where a game medium flows down is provided on the front side, and the display means and the reflection means are provided via the holding means. The display surface and the reflection surface are visible at each special display position through the window (opening 33a) formed on the game board while being supported by the game board.
The position changing means includes an angle changing means (such as an angle changing motor 117) that changes an inclination angle in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine with respect to one of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the display surface and the reflecting surface that are close to each other. Connecting means (connecting member 142) for connecting each part of the display means and the reflecting means, and follow-up means for causing the other of the display surface and the reflecting surface to follow the change of the angle of the one surface (Guide grooves 139, 140, etc.)
The first special display position is a position where an inclination of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is a side where the display surface faces the front of the gaming machine from the second special display position,
The follow-up means moves the other of the display surface and the reflective surface so that the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface becomes a specific angle at any of the first special display position and the second special display position. To follow,
The reflective surface is formed so as to reflect the entire or substantially entire display surface in the entire or substantially entire reflective surface when viewed from the predetermined position in the first special display position;
The display means so that when viewed from the predetermined position at the second special display position, an area in front of the gaming machine with respect to the window portion is not projected in an area where the display surface on the reflective surface is not projected. And the position of the said reflection means is set, The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the means 46, when the inclination angle of one of the display surface and the reflection surface is changed by the angle changing means, the other of the display surface and the reflection surface moves following it. The display position of the reflecting surface is changed in conjunction. Further, the number of members can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the angle changing means is provided for each of the display surface and the reflection surface.

  In this case, the reflection surface is formed so as to project the entire display surface or substantially the entire reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position at the first special display position. At one special display position, the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is enlarged as much as possible, and when the image is viewed from a predetermined position, it is possible to prevent the reflection surface from displaying anything other than the display on the display surface. .

  Further, in this configuration, the first special display position is a position where the inclination of the display surface in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine is a side where the display surface faces the front side of the gaming machine from the second special display position. At either the display position or the second special display position, the other of the display surface and the reflective surface is followed so that the angle of the reflective surface with respect to the display surface becomes a specific angle. Therefore, in the second special display position, the entire display surface is displayed on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, so that the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is enlarged as much as possible. Is maintained.

  However, in this configuration, at the second special display position, something other than the display surface is projected on the reflecting surface, and there is a concern that a game area and a game ball flowing down the gaming area are projected on the reflecting surface. Is done. On the other hand, when viewed from a predetermined position at the second special display position, the area in front of the gaming machine from the window portion of the game board is not projected in the area where the display surface on the reflecting surface is not projected. Since it is comprised, it is suppressed that the game area | region and the game ball which flows down the said game area | region are projected on a reflective surface.

Means 47. In any one of the means 40 to 46, a change operation means (angle setting operation device 204) operated to change the display positions of the display means and the reflection means;
Adjustment for driving and controlling the position changing means so as to change the display position of the display means and the reflecting means between at least the first special display position and the second special display position based on the operation of the changing operation means. Change control means (angle adjustment processing in the CPU 162 of the display control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 47, it is possible to adjust the inclination angle in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine for at least one of the display surface and the reflection surface as necessary. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the state of the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface to a state that is easy for the player to see.

  Note that the change operation means may be provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. In this case, the player can change the display position. Further, the change operation means may be provided inside the gaming machine or on the back side of the gaming machine. In this case, the display position can be changed, for example, by a game hall manager, but not by the player.

  Means 48. In any one of the means 30 to 47, a game change control for drivingly controlling the position changing means so as to change the positions of the display means and the reflecting means to any one of the plurality of display positions according to a game situation. A gaming machine comprising means (multi-view display processing in the CPU 162 of the display control device 82).

  According to the means 48, the size of the display area can be changed according to the game situation, and the display according to the game situation can be favorably performed.

Means 49. In means 48, the display means has an image display part (liquid crystal display part 90 etc.) for displaying an image on the display surface;
In the image display unit, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 103 and the like) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 102 and the like) are set, and a second image is set between the first image areas. Display control means (display control device 82) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the image area is disposed and the first image area is disposed between the second image areas;
The display means has an emission direction of light from the display unit so that images displayed in the plurality of first image areas can be viewed from the first direction and Light defining means (such as a parallax barrier panel 93) that makes it possible to visually recognize an image displayed in the second image area from the second direction;
The display control means has a variable display control means (VDP 165) that causes the image display section to display a variable pattern based on a predetermined start condition being satisfied,
A privilege granting means (CPU 152 of the main control device 65) for granting a privilege to a player when the variable display of the pattern is stopped and displayed as a predetermined specific display;
With
The game change control means drives and controls the position change means so as to change the position of the display means and the reflection means to one of the plurality of display positions in accordance with the state of the variable display of the pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the means 49, the size of the display area can be changed in accordance with the state of the variable display of the pattern, and the display according to the state of the variable display of the pattern can be favorably performed.

Means 50. In means 49, the variation display control means performs a variation display of the pattern by a plurality of pattern sequences, stops the variation display of the pattern for a part of the pattern sequence as a stage before ending the variation display of the pattern, It is a configuration that can display the reach pattern combination that may stop display the specific display, and can perform reach fluctuation display in the situation where the combination of the reach pattern is displayed,
The game change control means includes the display means and the reflection means when the pattern change display is the reach change display or when a special reach change display among a plurality of set reach change displays is performed. A game machine characterized in that the position changing means is driven and controlled so that the position of the game is changed.

  According to the means 50, the display positions of the display means and the reflecting means are changed when the pattern change display becomes reach change display or when special reach change display is performed among the set reach change displays. Therefore, the size and inclination angle of the display area can be changed between the reach fluctuation display or the special reach fluctuation display and the previous fluctuation display, and the degree of attention to the reach fluctuation display or the special reach fluctuation display can be increased. It becomes possible.

Means 51. In the means 50, as the plurality of display positions, non-special display positions (positions in the initial state) where the reflection of the image is not performed on the reflection surface are set.
The game change control means includes the display means and the reflection means when the pattern change display is the reach change display or when a special reach change display among a plurality of set reach change displays is performed. The game machine is characterized in that the position changing means is driven and controlled so that the position is changed from the non-special display position to the special display position.

  According to the means 51, as the positions where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means, a special display position in which the display area is constituted by the display surface and the reflection surface, and a non-special display in which the display area is constituted by the display surface By setting the position, the size of the display area can be changed. And when the change display of the pattern becomes reach change display, or when special reach change display is performed among the reach change displays set in plural types, the display is changed from the non-special display position to the special display position. The size of the area can be changed between the reach variation display or the special reach variation display and the previous variation display, and the degree of attention to the reach variation display or the special reach variation display can be increased.

Means 52. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
Position changing means (angle changing motor 117, guide grooves 139, 140, etc.) for changing the position of at least one of the display surface and the reflecting surface is provided, and a plurality of predetermined change ranges by the position changing means are provided. And a holding means (such as the display side support mechanism 83 and the reflection side support mechanism 85) for holding the display means and the reflection means at each of the plurality of display positions;
With
As the plurality of display positions, a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected on the reflective surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. A state in which the reflective surface is inclined, and at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine so that both the display surface and the reflective surface are visible from the front of the gaming machine; A special display position (position in the reach tilt state or position in the big hit tilt state) is set at least.

  According to the means 52, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of display positions including the special display position are set as positions where the display unit and the reflection unit are held by the holding unit, the display position can be changed as necessary. For example, by changing the display position according to the game situation, it becomes possible to perform display according to the game situation. In addition, for example, by making it possible to change the display position in accordance with the player's viewpoint, it is possible for the player to set a favorable state when viewing the display.

Means 53. A display having a display surface (such as the display surface 94) that can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. Means (symbol display device 81 etc.);
Reflection means (reflection unit 84 or the like) having a reflection surface (reflection surface 131 or the like) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
Position changing means (angle changing motor 117, guide grooves 139, 140, etc.) for changing the position of at least one of the display surface and the reflecting surface is provided, and a plurality of predetermined change ranges by the position changing means are provided. And a holding means (such as the display side support mechanism 83 and the reflection side support mechanism 85) for holding the display means and the reflection means at each of the plurality of display positions;
With
As the plurality of display positions, a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected on the reflective surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. The display in which the reflective surface is inclined and is visible from the first direction on the display surface, and the display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected from the reflective surface; A special display in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that both can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through the window panel on the front side of the gaming machine A gaming machine characterized in that at least a position (a position in a reach inclination state or a position in a big hit inclination state) is set.

  According to the means 53, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, so a space for providing a display area is provided. Even if the display area is not expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged, and the space for providing the display area can be expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. As compared with a configuration in which the display area is simply expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is attached to the window panel. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is inclined to the back side, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the game machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, since a plurality of display positions including the special display position are set as positions where the display unit and the reflection unit are held by the holding unit, the display position can be changed as necessary. For example, by changing the display position according to the game situation, it becomes possible to perform display according to the game situation. In addition, for example, by making it possible to change the display position in accordance with the player's viewpoint, it is possible for the player to set a favorable state when viewing the display.

  Note that any one of the characteristic configurations of the above-described means 2 to 29 may be applied to any one of the above-described means 30 to 53, and any one of the characteristic configurations of any of the means 54 to 76 described below. May be applied.

Means 54. A special display that has a display surface (display surface 94, etc.) and can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. A display area (viewing angle adjustment area 97, etc.) is set as a partial area of the display surface, and the non-special display is the same when viewed from the respective directions with respect to other areas. Comprising display means (symbol display device 81 etc.) in which areas (non-adjustment areas 95, 96 etc.) are set,
Further, reflecting means (such as the reflecting unit 84) having a reflecting surface (such as the reflecting surface 131) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
In the special display area, the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. A display that is visible from the first direction in the special display area, and a display that is visible from the second direction in the special display area and reflected from the reflecting surface. Special display position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both can be viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine (position in the reach inclination state or jackpot Holding means (the display side support mechanism 83, the reflection side support mechanism 85, etc.) that holds the display means and the reflection means at a position in an inclined state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 54, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Further, in addition to the special display area, a non-special display area is set on the display surface so that the display when viewed from the first direction and the display when viewed from the second direction are the same. ing. It is considered that the display content of the special display area is slightly coarser than that of the non-special display area. Under such circumstances, by setting both the special display area and the non-special display area on the display surface, the display area can be enlarged as described above, and the display type and contents can be changed. Accordingly, the display can be performed in a state where the display content is not rough.

Means 55. Display means (design display device 81, etc.) having an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 90, etc.) for displaying an image on a display surface (display surface 94, etc.);
In the image display unit, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 103 and the like) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 102 and the like) are set, and a second image is set between the first image areas. Display control means (display control device 82) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the image area is disposed and the first image area is disposed between the second image areas;
With
The display means defines an emission direction of light from the display surface, thereby enabling an image displayed in the plurality of first image areas to be visually recognized from a first direction with respect to the display surface. Light defining means (such as a parallax barrier panel 93) that makes it possible to visually recognize an image displayed in the second image area from a second direction with respect to the display surface, and the display of the image is defined by the light defining means. The special display area (viewing angle adjustment area 97, etc.) to be set is set as a partial area of the display surface, and the display of the image is not specified by the light defining means on the display surface. Area (non-adjustment areas 95, 96, etc.) is set,
Further, reflecting means (such as the reflecting unit 84) having a reflecting surface (such as the reflecting surface 131) capable of reflecting an image on the display surface;
In the special display area, the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that an image visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. A display that is visible from the first direction in the special display area, and a display that is visible from the second direction in the special display area and reflected from the reflecting surface. Special display position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both can be viewed from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine (position in the reach inclination state or jackpot Holding means (the display side support mechanism 83, the reflection side support mechanism 85, etc.) that holds the display means and the reflection means at a position in an inclined state);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 55, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and images different on the display surface and the reflection surface respectively. Can be displayed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged compared to a configuration in which an image is displayed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  In addition to the special display area, a non-special display area is set on the display surface so that the image viewed from the first direction and the image viewed from the second direction are the same. ing. It is considered that the special display area has lower image resolution, brightness, and the like than the non-special display area. Under such circumstances, by setting both the special display area and the non-special display area on the display surface, the size and size of the display area can be increased as described above, and the type and content of the image can be changed. Accordingly, the image can be displayed with relatively high resolution and brightness.

Means 56. In means 55, the display control means comprises:
Fluctuation display control means for controlling the display of the image display unit so that a variation display of the picture is performed in the non-special display area based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (step S1202 in the VDP 165, etc.) When,
Auxiliary for controlling display of the image display unit so that at least one of a background image or an effect image corresponding to the variable display of the picture is displayed in at least the first image region and the second image region. Display control means (step S1201, etc. in VDP 165);
With
The gaming machine is characterized in that a privilege is given to a player when the display of the variation of the pattern is stopped and displayed as a predetermined specific display.

  In a configuration in which a privilege is given to the player when the variable display of the picture is stopped, it is necessary for the player to clearly recognize the picture that is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, according to the means 56, since the variation display of the pattern is performed in the non-special display area where the resolution and brightness of the image are relatively high, the player can clearly recognize the variation displayed pattern. be able to. On the other hand, in the special display area, at least one of the background image or the effect image corresponding to the variable display of the pattern is displayed. Therefore, the display area can be enlarged by providing the special display area and the reflecting means. It is possible to achieve the effect of achieving the above.

Means 57. In the means 56, the holding means includes position changing means (such as an angle changing motor 117 and guide grooves 139, 140) for changing the positions of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the change range by the position changing means is within the range. Includes the special display position, and when viewed from the predetermined position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area are displayed. A non-special display position (position in the initial state) at which the image can be visually recognized on the surface and no reflection of the image on the reflection surface is included, and the display is performed at each of the special display position and the non-special display position. Means and the reflection means can be held,
When the display means and the reflection means are held at the non-special display position, the variable display control means displays the image display unit so that a picture is variablely displayed in the non-special display area. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled.

  According to the means 57, since the special display position and the non-special display position are set as the positions where the display means and the reflection means are held by the holding means, the size of the display area can be changed. In particular, in the special display position, the image displayed in the second image area is configured to be visible by being reflected on the reflection surface when viewed from a predetermined position, whereas non-special display. In the position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area are configured to be visible together on the display surface when viewed from a predetermined position. It is possible to set a large change width of the size of the display area at the special display position and the non-special display position.

  In this case, at the non-special display position, when viewed from a predetermined position, both the image displayed in the first image area and the image displayed in the second image area can be viewed together on the display surface. However, if the first image area and the second image area are kept shielded by the light regulating means, the image in the special display area is compared with the non-special display area. The state in which the resolution is lowered is maintained. On the other hand, at the non-special display position, the display of the variation of the pattern is performed in the non-special display area, so that the player can clearly recognize the variation of the design.

  Means 58. In the means 57, the variation display control means displays the variation of the pattern in at least the first image area and the second image area when the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position. A game machine that controls display of the image display unit so that

  According to the means 58, at the special display position, at least the special display area of the display surface and the reflective surface are subjected to the variation display of the pattern, so that the variation display of the pattern can be performed dynamically.

  Means 59. In means 58, the variation display control means is configured to display a variation display of a pattern in a plurality of pattern sequences as the variation display of the pattern, and stop and display a combination of jackpot designs as the specific display. As a step before ending the variable display, the variable display of the pattern is stopped for a part of the graphic sequence, the combination of reach patterns that may stop display the jackpot pattern combination is displayed, and the combination of the reach patterns is The reach variation display of the pattern is performed by the remaining pattern sequence under the displayed state, and the reach variation display is performed in a state where the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position. The reach pattern is displayed in the non-special display area. Game machine to be.

  With the configuration of the means 58 described above, in the special display position, at least in the special display area and the reflective surface of the display surface, the variation display of the pattern is performed. According to the means 59, the reach variation display is performed at the special display position. In such a case, since the reach pattern combination is displayed in the non-special display area, the player can clearly recognize the reach pattern combination.

Means 60. In any one of means 55 to 59, the display means includes a backlight (backlight 92) for illuminating the image display unit from the back surface side,
The backlight is arranged such that the amount of light directed from the backlight toward the region corresponding to the special display region in the image display unit is greater than the amount of light directed toward the region corresponding to the non-special display region. A gaming machine comprising light amount adjustment means (transmission amount adjustment panel 106) for adjusting the amount of light emitted from the light to the image display unit.

  According to the means 60, it is possible to reduce the luminance difference between the special display area and the non-special display area.

Means 61. In any one of means 55 to 60, the display means includes:
A first backlight (first backlight 331) for illuminating an area corresponding to the special display area in the image display unit from the back side;
A second backlight (second backlight 332) for illuminating an area corresponding to the non-special display area from the back side in the image display unit;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 61, since different backlights are provided for the special display area and the non-special display area, the brightness of the image displayed in the special display area and the non-special display area are displayed. It is possible to individually adjust the brightness of the image. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the luminance difference between the special display area and the non-special display area.

Means 62. In any one of the means 54 to 61, the special display position is a position where at least the display surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine,
An area on the display surface at the special display position on the front side of the gaming machine is set as the non-special display area.

  According to the means 62, in the configuration in which the display surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine at the special display position, the player is such that the display area composed of the display surface and the reflection surface is also inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. Visible to. Of the display surface and the reflective surface, the display surface is a region in front of the gaming machine in the display region. In this case, since the area on the display surface in front of the gaming machine at the special display position is set as a non-special display area, it is possible to suppress display roughness at a relatively conspicuous position.

  Means 63. In any one of the means 54 to 62, when the reflection surface is viewed from the predetermined direction at the special display position, the reflection display area is entirely or substantially the whole of the special display area. A gaming machine characterized by being projected.

  According to the means 63, in the configuration in which the special display area and the non-special display area are set on the display surface, the display area composed of the special display area and the reflection surface is enlarged as much as possible and the predetermined position is set. When viewed from above, it is possible to prevent the portion other than the special display area from being projected on the reflecting surface.

Means 64. A special display that has a display surface (display surface 94, etc.) and can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. A display area (viewing angle adjustment area 97, etc.) is set as a partial area of the display surface, and the non-special display is the same when viewed from the respective directions with respect to other areas. Comprising display means (symbol display device 81 etc.) in which areas (non-adjustment areas 95, 96 etc.) are set,
Further, reflecting means (such as the reflecting unit 84) having a reflecting surface (such as the reflecting surface 131) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
In the special display area, the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. A special display position where at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine so that both the display surface and the reflective surface are visible from the front of the gaming machine. Holding means (display-side support mechanism 83, reflection-side support mechanism 85, etc.) for holding the display means and the reflection means at a position in the reach inclination state or a position in the big hit inclination state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 64, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, so that the space for providing the display area is the vertical direction of the gaming machine, The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area is simply increased. Compared to the configuration in which the gaming machine is expanded in the vertical direction and the gaming machine in the horizontal direction, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared with the structure which inclines, the dimension of the space for providing a display area in the front-back direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Further, in addition to the special display area, a non-special display area is set on the display surface so that the display when viewed from the first direction and the display when viewed from the second direction are the same. ing. It is considered that the display content of the special display area is slightly coarser than that of the non-special display area. Under such circumstances, by setting both the special display area and the non-special display area on the display surface, the display area can be enlarged as described above, and the display type and contents can be changed. Accordingly, the display can be performed in a state where the display content is not rough.

Means 65. A special display that has a display surface (display surface 94, etc.) and can display differently when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. A display area (viewing angle adjustment area 97, etc.) is set as a partial area of the display surface, and the non-special display is the same when viewed from the respective directions with respect to other areas. Comprising display means (symbol display device 81 etc.) in which areas (non-adjustment areas 95, 96 etc.) are set,
Further, reflecting means (such as the reflecting unit 84) having a reflecting surface (such as the reflecting surface 131) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
In the special display area, the reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction is reflected by the reflective surface and is visible from the first direction. A display that is visible from the first direction in the special display area, and a display that is visible from the second direction in the special display area and reflected from the reflecting surface. A special display position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflective surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so that both can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine through the window panel on the front side of the gaming machine Holding means (display-side support mechanism 83 and reflection-side support mechanism 8) that holds the display means and the reflection means at the position in the reach inclination state or the position in the big hit inclination state. And etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 65, the display means and the reflection means are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the reflection surface are configured as display areas, and the display surface and the reflection surface are differently displayed. Can be performed. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position in which at least one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, so a space for providing a display area is provided. Even if the display area is not expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged, and the space for providing the display area can be expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. As compared with a configuration in which the display area is simply expanded in the up-down direction of the gaming machine or in the left-right direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the reflection surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is attached to the window panel. Compared to the configuration in which the game machine is inclined to the back side, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the game machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Further, in addition to the special display area, a non-special display area is set on the display surface so that the display when viewed from the first direction and the display when viewed from the second direction are the same. ing. It is considered that the display content of the special display area is slightly coarser than that of the non-special display area. Under such circumstances, by setting both the special display area and the non-special display area on the display surface, the display area can be enlarged as described above, and the display type and contents can be changed. Accordingly, the display can be performed in a state where the display content is not rough.

  Note that any one of the characteristic configurations of the above-described means 2 to 53 may be applied to any one of the above-described means 54 to 65, and any one of the characteristic configurations of any of the means 66 to 76 described later. May be applied.

Means 66. A display unit having a display surface (display surface 94) and capable of differentiating the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. (Symbol display device 81),
An outer reflecting member (half mirror 278) having an outer reflecting surface (outer reflecting surface 287) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
The outer reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected from the outer reflective surface. In addition, both the display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and the display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected from the outer reflective surface are games. The display at a special display position (a position in the reach inclination state) in which at least one of the display surface or the outer reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so as to be visible from a predetermined position in front of the machine Holding means (the angle changing mechanism 273 and the tracking mechanism 274) for holding the means and the outer reflecting member;
A light emitting means (effect light emitting unit 286) capable of irradiating light to the outer reflecting member;
With
When the light is not irradiated from the light emitting means, the rear side of the outer reflective member is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine and light is emitted from the light emitting means. The game machine is characterized in that the light is transmitted through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine so that the rear side of the outer reflecting member is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the means 66, the display means and the outer reflection member are held at the special display position by the holding means, so that the display surface and the outer reflection surface are configured as display areas, and each of the display surface and the outer reflection surface is further provided. Different displays can be performed at. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position where at least one of the display surface or the outer reflective surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, Compared to a configuration in which the display area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine and in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the outer reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared to the configuration in which the display area is inclined, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the outer reflecting member is provided, and when the light is emitted from the light emitting means, the light passes through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine, and the outer reflecting member Is visible from the front of the gaming machine. In this configuration, it is possible to produce a light effect using a configuration for increasing the display area, and it is possible to diversify display modes in the display area.

  The light emitting means may be provided behind the outer reflecting member and configured to irradiate light on a surface of the outer reflecting member opposite to the outer reflecting surface.

  Means 67. In the means 66, an effect member (effect member 275) is provided on the rear side of the outer reflecting member, and when the light is not irradiated from the light emitting means, the effect member is in front of the gaming machine. When the light emitting means emits light, the light passes through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine, so that the effect member can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by being visible.

  According to the means 67, it is possible to produce an effect using an effect member using a configuration for enlarging the display area. In particular, in this configuration, by switching between the start and stop of light irradiation from the light emitting means, the state where the effect member as an object is superimposed on the display in the display area and the effect member are not visible or visible Switching to a difficult state can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of control related to the start and stop switching of the effect using the effect member.

  Means 68. In the means 67, the effect member is provided so as to be disposed between the outer reflection member and an image of the effect member by irradiating light from the light emitting means. A gaming machine, further comprising an inner reflecting member (reflecting mirror 283) for reflecting toward a surface opposite to the reflecting surface.

  According to the means 68, when an effect using the effect member is performed, the image of the effect member is reflected between the outer reflection member and the inner reflection member, and the player has a plurality of effect members. You will see as if you are. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the production using the production member while suppressing the number of production members.

  Means 69. A gaming machine according to claim 67, characterized in that a housing part (unit base 276) for housing the effect member and having the light emitting means is provided on the rear side of the outer reflecting member.

  According to the means 69, since the effect member is accommodated in the accommodating portion, the area that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the outer reflecting member when the light is emitted from the light emitting means includes the effect member. It can be defined in the internal space of the accommodating part.

  Means 70. In the means 69, the effect member is disposed in the housing portion between the outer reflecting member and the image of the effect member when the light is emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the outer side. A gaming machine, further comprising an inner reflecting member (reflecting mirror 283) that reflects toward a surface opposite to the outer reflecting surface of the member.

  According to the means 70, when the effect using the effect member is performed, the image of the effect member is reflected between the outer reflection member and the inner reflection member, and the player has a plurality of effect members. It can be seen as if it is. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the production using the production member while suppressing the number of production members.

  Means 71. In means 69 or 70, at least a pair of opposing wall portions (ceiling surface 279 and ceiling surface 279 and the wall portion extending from the rear side of the outer reflecting member in the housing portion toward the outer reflecting member and facing the effect member. An inner reflecting member (reflecting mirror 283) is provided on the bottom surface 280 or the like to reflect an image of the effect member by irradiating light from the light emitting means toward the opposite surface of the outer reflecting member. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the means 71, when the effect using the effect member is performed, the image of the effect member is reflected between the outer reflection member and the inner reflection member, and the player has a plurality of effect members. It can be seen as if it is. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the production using the production member while suppressing the number of production members.

Means 72. In any one of means 69 to 71, the holding means has position changing means (angle changing mechanism 273) for changing the position of at least one of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the change by the position changing means. The range includes a plurality of predetermined display positions including the special display position, and further holds the display means and the outer reflecting member in each of the plurality of display positions,
The gaming machine, wherein the housing portion is integrated with the outer reflecting member.

  According to the means 72, since a plurality of display positions including the special display position are set as positions where the display means and the outer reflecting member are held by the holding means, the display position can be changed as necessary. Is possible. For example, by changing the display position according to the game situation, it becomes possible to perform display according to the game situation. In addition, for example, by making it possible to change the display position in accordance with the player's viewpoint, it is possible for the player to set a favorable state when viewing the display.

  In this case, since the housing portion provided with the production member and the light emitting means is integrated with the outer reflection member, the production member and the light emission means move in accordance with the movement of the outer reflection member. Both can be linked well.

Means 73. In any one of the means 66 to 72, the holding means includes a position changing means (angle changing mechanism 273) for changing the positions of the display surface and the outer reflecting surface, and is within a change range by the position changing means. Includes the special display position, and includes a non-special display position (a position in the initial state) in which display reflection is not performed on the outer reflecting surface. Further, the special display position and the non-special display are included. The display means and the outer reflecting member can be held at each position,
Furthermore, a game change control means (of the display control device 82) that drives and controls the position changing means so as to change the positions of the display means and the outer reflecting member to any one of the plurality of display positions according to the game situation. CPU 162, step S1406 and step S1407, etc.)
Light emission control means (steps S1410 and S1413 in the CPU 162 of the display control device 82) for controlling light emission of the light emission means so that light is emitted from the light emission means according to the game situation;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the means 73, as a position where the display means and the outer reflection member are held by the holding means, a special display position in which the display area is constituted by the display surface and the outer reflection surface, and a non-display area is constituted by the display surface. By setting the special display position, the size of the display area can be changed. Then, by changing the display position between the special display position and the non-special display position according to the game situation, the size of the display area according to the game situation can be changed.

  In this case, light is emitted from the light emitting means according to the game situation, and an effect is produced by the light from the outer reflecting member and the light emitting means. In other words, according to this configuration, the display area size is changed according to the gaming situation and the effect by the light is performed. Therefore, the state of the display area is switched according to the gaming situation in a plurality of stages. Moreover, each of these stages is performed with different visual effects. Therefore, the degree of attention to the display area can be increased.

  The light emission control unit is irradiated with light when the display unit and the outer reflecting member are held at the special display position and the game state is a predetermined specific game state. Thus, the light emitting means may be configured to control light emission. In this case, the effect by the light is more related to the game situation.

Means 74. In means 73, the display means has an image display unit (liquid crystal display unit 90 or the like) for displaying an image on the display surface;
In the image display unit, a plurality of first image areas (lower display area 103 and the like) and a plurality of second image areas (upper display area 102 and the like) are set, and a second image is set between the first image areas. Display control means (VDP165) capable of controlling the display of the image display unit so that the image area is disposed and the first image area is disposed between the second image areas;
The display means has an emission direction of light from the display surface so that an image displayed in the plurality of first image regions can be viewed from the first direction and the plurality of Light defining means (such as a parallax barrier panel 93) that makes it possible to visually recognize an image displayed in the second image area from the second direction;
With
In the display area including the display surface and the outer reflection surface, the display control unit performs a variable display of the pattern by a plurality of pattern rows, and for some of the pattern rows as a pre-stage to end the variable display of the pattern Stops the variable display of the pattern, displays the combination of reach patterns that may be displayed in a predetermined combination of jackpot patterns, and displays the reach variation display under the situation where the combination of reach patterns is displayed. Fluctuation display control means (drawing process in VDP 165) that can be performed,
When the variation display of the pattern is stopped and displayed as a combination of the jackpot pattern, a bonus is given to the player,
The game change control means includes the display means and the outer reflection when the picture change display is the reach change display or when a special reach change display is performed among a plurality of types of reach change displays. The position changing means is driven and controlled so that the position of the member is changed from the non-special display position to the special display position.
The light emission control means starts irradiation of light from the light emission means at a predetermined timing in a situation where the display means and the outer reflection member are held at the special display position and the reach variation display is performed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the means 74, when the reach variation display is performed, the size of the display area can be expanded in the reach variation display by changing from the non-special display position to the special display position. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention. In addition, irradiation of light from the light emitting means is started at a predetermined timing in a situation where the reach variation display is performed, and an effect with a different visual effect is performed, so that the degree of attention to the reach variation display is further increased. Is possible.

  The fluctuation display control means is a first reach fluctuation display for performing the first reach fluctuation display when the display means and the outer reflecting member are held at the special display position as the reach fluctuation display. The control means and the reach fluctuation display are different from the first reach fluctuation display when the display means and the outer reflecting member are held at the special display position and light is emitted from the light emitting means. It is good also as a structure provided with the 2nd reach fluctuation display control means to perform reach fluctuation display. In this case, the effect by irradiation of light from the light emitting means and the reach variation display in the display area are more related.

Means 75. A display unit having a display surface (display surface 94) and capable of differentiating the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. (Symbol display device 81),
An outer reflecting member (half mirror 278) having an outer reflecting surface (outer reflecting surface 287) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
The outer reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected from the outer reflective surface. A special display position in which at least one of the display surface or the outer reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that the display surface and the outer reflective surface are visible from the front of the gaming machine. Holding means (an angle changing mechanism 273 and a follow-up mechanism 274) for holding the display means and the outer reflecting member at a position in the reach inclination state;
A light emitting means (effect light emitting unit 286) capable of irradiating light to the outer reflecting member;
With
When the light is not irradiated from the light emitting means, the rear side of the outer reflective member is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine and light is emitted from the light emitting means. The game machine is characterized in that the light is transmitted through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine so that the rear side of the outer reflecting member is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the means 75, the display means and the outer reflection member are held at the special display position by the holding means, whereby the display surface and the outer reflection surface are configured as display areas, and each of the display surface and the outer reflection surface is further provided. Different displays can be performed at. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position where at least one of the display surface or the outer reflective surface is inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. The display area can be enlarged without expanding in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, and even if the space for providing the display area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, Compared to a configuration in which the display area is expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine and in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each direction.

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the outer reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared to the configuration in which the display area is inclined, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the outer reflecting member is provided, and when the light is emitted from the light emitting means, the light passes through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine, and the outer reflecting member Is visible from the front of the gaming machine. In this configuration, it is possible to produce a light effect using a configuration for increasing the display area, and it is possible to diversify display modes in the display area.

  The light emitting means may be provided behind the outer reflecting member and configured to irradiate light on a surface of the outer reflecting member opposite to the outer reflecting surface.

Means 76. A display unit having a display surface (display surface 94) and capable of differentiating the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction. (Symbol display device 81),
An outer reflecting member (half mirror 278) having an outer reflecting surface (outer reflecting surface 287) capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
The outer reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface so that a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected from the outer reflective surface. In addition, both the display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and the display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected from the outer reflective surface are games. A special display position (reach) in which at least one of the display surface or the outer reflective surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel so as to be visible from the front of the gaming machine through the window panel on the front side of the machine. Holding means (the angle changing mechanism 273 and the follow-up mechanism 274) for holding the display means and the outer reflecting member at a position in the inclined state for use;
A light emitting means (effect light emitting unit 286) capable of irradiating light to the outer reflecting member;
With
When the light is not irradiated from the light emitting means, the rear side of the outer reflective member is not visible or difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine and light is emitted from the light emitting means. The game machine is characterized in that the light is transmitted through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine so that the rear side of the outer reflecting member is visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the means 76, the display means and the outer reflection member are held at the special display position by the holding means, whereby the display surface and the outer reflection surface are configured as display areas, and each of the display surface and the outer reflection surface is further provided. Different displays can be performed at. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which display is performed only on the display surface.

  In particular, the special display position held by the holding means is a position where at least one of the display surface or the outer reflective surface is inclined to the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the window panel, and thus a space for providing a display area. The display area can be enlarged without extending the vertical direction of the gaming machine or the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, and the space for providing the display area can be expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or the horizontal direction of the gaming machine. However, compared with a configuration in which the display area is simply expanded in the vertical direction of the gaming machine or in the horizontal direction of the gaming machine, the display area can be enlarged while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area in each of the above directions. .

  Furthermore, since the special display position held by the holding means is a position where the outer reflective surface is inclined with respect to the display surface, the display means having the same display surface as the display area is arranged in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. Compared to the configuration in which the display area is inclined, the size of the space for providing the display area in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to increase the size of the display area while suppressing the expansion of the space for providing the display area.

  Furthermore, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the outer reflecting member is provided, and when the light is emitted from the light emitting means, the light passes through the outer reflecting member toward the front of the gaming machine, and the outer reflecting member Is visible from the front of the gaming machine. In this configuration, it is possible to produce a light effect using a configuration for increasing the display area, and it is possible to diversify display modes in the display area.

  The light emitting means may be provided behind the outer reflecting member and configured to irradiate light on a surface of the outer reflecting member opposite to the outer reflecting surface.

  Note that the characteristic configurations of any of the means 2 to 65 may be applied to any of the means 66 to 76.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures based on the operation of the start operation means, and based on the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped and a privilege is given to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine main body 12 in the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be pivotable forward (openable and closable). . In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 can also be formed of a metal such as synthetic resin or aluminum.

  A gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported on one side of the outer frame 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support bracket 21 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and the lower frame portion and the left frame in the outer frame 11 are further fixed. A lower support metal fitting 22 is provided at a connection portion with the portion. The upper support bracket 21 and the lower support bracket 22 constitute a support mechanism, and the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by the support mechanism.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 23 at its rotating tip, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the locking device 23 is provided. The heel member 24 is received by the heel receiving portion provided on the inner surface of the right frame portion of the outer frame 11, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is prevented. On the other hand, the hook member 24 is received by the hook receiving portion of the outer frame 11 by performing the unlocking operation using the unlock key on the cylinder lock 25 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. The state is released and the gaming machine body 12 can be released from the outer frame 11. The locking device 23 also has a function of locking an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 described later.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable and closable) with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side as the rotation front end side (opening / closing front end side) in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is a rotation front end side (opening / closing front end). Side) and can be rotated forward. Further, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation front end side ( It can be rotated backward as the opening / closing tip side.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described. FIG. 3 is a front view of the inner frame 13.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 32 is formed at the center of the resin base 31. A game board 33 is detachably attached to the resin base 31 in a state where the game board 33 stands vertically or substantially vertically. The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 33 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 32 of the resin base 31.

  Here, the structure of the game board 33 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 33 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 34, a variable winning device 35, an operating port 36, a through gate 37, a symbol display unit 38, and the like. In this case, the symbol display unit 38 is arranged so as to include the central portion of the game area, and the operation port 36 and the variable prize-winning device 35 are arranged vertically below the symbol display unit 38. Further, two general winning ports 34 are provided on the left and right with respect to the operating port 36 and the variable winning device 35, respectively, and one through gate 37 is provided on each of the left and right with reference to the symbol display unit 38. ing.

  When a game ball enters the general winning opening 34, the variable winning device 35, and the operation opening 36, it is detected by a detection switch built in each winning portion, and a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. The Note that the variable prize-winning device 35 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and can be switched to a predetermined open state in which a game ball can easily enter in the case of a big hit. Yes.

  In addition, an out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game board 33, and game balls that have not entered the general winning port 34, the variable winning device 35, and the operating port 36 are discharged from the gaming area through the out port 39. Is done. The game board 33 is provided with a large number of nails 40 for distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  The symbol display unit 38 includes a symbol display device that variably displays symbols with a winning at the operating port 36 as a trigger. The symbol display unit 38 is a game in which the display surface of the symbol display device can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through a rectangular shape, specifically, a rectangular (rectangular) opening 33a provided in the game board 33. It is arranged on the back side of the board 33 (see FIG. 5 etc.).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 33 is provided with a center frame 41 so as to define an opening 33 a that allows the display surface of the symbol display device to be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The center frame 41 includes a roof unit 42 provided to define the upper edge and the left and right side edges of the opening 33a, and a stage unit 43 provided to define the lower edge of the opening 33a. ing. The roof unit 42 has a ball entrance at an upper frame portion thereof, and a pair of stage guide passages are formed for guiding the game balls entering the ball entrance onto the stage unit 43. When the game ball enters the ball entrance, the game ball is guided onto the stage unit 43.

  The stage unit 43 has on its upper surface a rolling surface 44 on which a game ball can roll. The rolling surface 44 has a width of about two game balls and has a smooth streamline shape that is symmetrical with respect to the center. Specifically, the rolling surface 44 is a ridge 45 with a central portion rising upward, the left and right sides are valleys 46 that are recessed downward, and the left and right ends are above the central portion. Is located.

  The trough 46 has a shape inclined downward toward the front. The game ball that has reached the valley 46 in a sufficiently decelerated state is guided by the inclination of the valley 46 and discharged from the front edge of the valley 46 toward the lower side of the stage unit 43.

  A guide passage 47 is formed below the peak 45 in the stage unit 43, and an inlet to the guide passage 47 is formed at the rear of the peak 45, and the peak 45 is inclined downward toward the entrance. It has become. The guide passage 47 is inclined downward toward the front, and the game ball introduced into the guide passage 47 is discharged to the lower side of the stage unit 43 through the guide passage 47. The outlet of the guide passage 47 is positioned vertically above the operation port 36. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the guide passage 47 can easily enter the operation port 36.

  The roof unit 42 in the center frame 41 is provided with a first specific display unit 51 and a second specific display unit 52. Further, the stage unit 43 is provided with a first reserved light emitting unit 53 and a second reserved light emitting unit 54. The first hold light emitting unit 53 corresponds to the symbol display device and the first specific display unit 51, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 36 is held up to 4 times, and the first hold light emitting unit 53 is turned on. The number of reserved items is displayed. The second reserved light emitting unit 54 corresponds to the second specific display unit 52, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 37 is held up to four times, and the number of held is turned on when the second reserved light emitting unit 54 is turned on. It is displayed.

  Basically, a plurality of variable display areas in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order are set on the display surface of the symbol display device, and the symbols are variably displayed in each variable display region. For example, a symbol sequence in which multiple types of symbols are arranged in a predetermined order is set side by side on the left, middle, and right, and the various types of symbols in each symbol sequence are scrolled up and down in a predetermined order. Is displayed. When a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a big hit state (special game state) occurs. The specific configuration of the symbol display device will be described in detail later together with the specific configuration of the symbol display unit 38.

  In the first specific display unit 51, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order using a winning at the operation port 36 as a trigger, and if the display is stopped in a predetermined color, a big hit occurs. Further, in the second specific display section 52, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 37, and when the stop color is displayed in a predetermined color, the operation port 36 is displayed. The accompanying electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time.

  An inner rail portion 55 and an outer rail portion 56 are attached to the game board 33, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 55 and the outer rail portion 56, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 57. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 3, the game ball launching mechanism 57 is attached below the window hole 32 in the resin base 31. The game ball launching mechanism 57 is launched by operating the handle device 58 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window part 61 has a substantially elliptical shape and is fitted with a window panel 62 having transparency. The window panel 62 is formed of a colorless and transparent glass material in the same or substantially the same plate shape, but may be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. By providing the window panel 62, the opening of the window portion 61 is closed. Note that the window panel 62 is provided to stand in the vertical direction, but may be provided to be inclined in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

  Around the window 61, various light emitting units such as a decorative light emitting unit and an error display light emitting unit are provided. In addition, at the upper left and upper right positions, speaker units are provided for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 63 and a lower bulging portion 64 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 63a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 63, and a lower plate 64a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 64. The upper plate 63a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 57 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 64a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 63a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the game board 33.

  As shown in FIG. 5, a main controller 65 and a sound emission controller 66 are mounted on the back of the game board 33. The main control device 65 is configured such that a main control board that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the occurrence of a power failure are accommodated in a substrate box 65a made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  The voice light emission control device 66 includes a voice light emission control board that controls voice, light emission display, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 65. The voice light emission control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 66a is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 71, and a payout mechanism 72 and a control device assembly unit 73 are attached to the back pack 71. The back pack 71 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 74 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the sound emission control device 66 and the symbol display unit 38 from the rear. doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 72 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 74, and a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 75. A payout device 76 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 63a or the lower plate 64a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 72 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of AC 24 volts, for example, is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power supply is provided.

  The control device assembly unit 73 includes a payout control device 77 and a power source and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 77 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 76 is accommodated in a substrate box. The power source and launch control device 78 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle device 58 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

  Next, the symbol display unit 38 mounted on the game board 33 will be described in detail. 6 is a perspective view of the game board 33 viewed from the front for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 38, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board 33 viewed from the rear for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 38. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the game board 33 for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 38. 6 to 8, the main controller 65 and the sound emission controller 66 are omitted.

  The symbol display unit 38 is disposed on the back side of the game board 33. As already described, the symbol display unit 38 includes the symbol display device 81, a display control device 82 that controls the display of the symbol display device 81, a display-side support mechanism 83 that supports the symbol display device 81, and a symbol. A reflection unit 84 for reflecting a part of an image displayed on the display device 81 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a reflection side support mechanism 85 for supporting the reflection unit 84 are provided.

  The symbol display device 81 is a 10.6 type liquid crystal display device. Here, the configuration of the symbol display device 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 and 10 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the symbol display device 81 of the symbol display unit 38. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the symbol display device 81 is provided on each of a TN-type liquid crystal display unit 90 in which liquid crystal is sealed between a pair of transparent substrates, and the front and rear of the liquid crystal display unit 90, respectively. The polarizing film 91, the backlight 92 provided behind the rear polarizing film 91 so as to illuminate the entire back surface of the liquid crystal display section 90 through the rear polarizing film 91, the front polarizing film 91 and the liquid crystal display section. And a parallax barrier panel 93 provided so as to face the entire front surface of the liquid crystal display unit 90. In this case, the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is constituted by the front surface of the polarizing film 91 on the front side, but a protective part such as a colorless transparent protective film or a colorless transparent protective panel is provided in front of the polarizing film 91, You may comprise the display surface 94 of the symbol display apparatus 81 by the front surface of the said protection part. The display surface 94 is formed in a planar shape that is flush with the entire surface or substantially the entire surface.

  The liquid crystal display unit 90 has 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 768 pixels in the vertical direction, and has a total of 1280 × 768 pixels. However, the number of pixels is not limited to this and is arbitrary. is there. Further, the liquid crystal display unit 90 is not limited to the TN type, and for example, an ASV type may be used. In addition, the position of the parallax barrier panel 93 may be arranged in front of the front polarizing film 91 as long as it functions as a parallax barrier. 81 display surfaces 94 are formed. Further, the parallax barrier panel 93 may be disposed between the liquid crystal display unit 90 and the rear polarizing film 91, or may be disposed between the rear polarizing film 91 and the backlight 92. In the symbol display device 81, a control board provided with an image processing device and the like is mounted behind the backlight 92.

  The symbol display device 81 can perform multi-view display, specifically dual view display, by adjusting the viewing angle by the display control mode of the liquid crystal display unit 90 by the display control device 82 and the parallax barrier panel 93. Is configured to do. That is, as shown in FIG. 9B, the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 has an upper non-adjustment region 95 and a lower non-adjustment region 96 in which the regions on both ends in the vertical direction do not perform dual view display, respectively. In addition, a region between the non-adjustment regions 95 and 96 is set as a viewing angle adjustment region 97.

  Here, a specific configuration in which the viewing angle is adjusted in the viewing angle adjustment region 97 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b). For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 10B, the thickness of the liquid crystal sealing portion of the liquid crystal display unit 90 is shown larger than the actual one. The same applies to the drawings other than FIG. 10B showing the liquid crystal display unit.

  In display control for the liquid crystal display unit 90, in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, as shown in FIG. 10A, a horizontal line region is configured by unit pixel regions (regions for one pixel) 101 arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The In this case, it can be considered that a large number of horizontal line regions having a width corresponding to the vertical size of the unit pixel region 101 are arranged in the vertical direction. A large number of these horizontal line regions arranged in parallel in the vertical direction are assigned to the upper display region 102 and the lower display region 103 when performing dual view display. The upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103 are set so as to be alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction.

  A parallax barrier panel 93 is provided so as to adjust the viewing angles of the upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103. As shown in FIG. 10B, the parallax barrier panel 93 is formed of a colorless and transparent glass plate and is disposed so as to be parallel to the liquid crystal display unit 90. In the parallax barrier panel 93, a light shielding material is deposited in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, and a light shielding layer 104 that blocks light is formed. Note that a carbon-containing material is used as a material for forming the light shielding layer 104, but any material can be used as long as the light shielding layer 104 can be formed. The light shielding layers 104 are formed at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and between these light shielding layers 104 are transmissive layers 105 that transmit light.

  Each of the light shielding layers 104 and each of the transmission layers 105 is linearly formed in the horizontal direction so as to correspond to the upper display region 102 and the lower display region 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90, and alternately arranged in the vertical direction. Is formed. In addition, each of the light shielding layers 104 and each of the transmission layers 105 has a vertical width dimension that is substantially the same as the vertical width dimension of the upper display region 102 and the lower display region 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90. In the state where the symbol display device 81 is erected in the vertical direction, the upper display area of the upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103 is viewed when the viewing angle adjustment area 97 of the display surface 94 is viewed from above. 102, the upper display area 102 and the lower display area so that the lower display area 103 can be visually recognized among the upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103 when viewed from the lower side. The arrangement positions of the light shielding layer 104 and the transmission layer 105 with respect to the arrangement position 103 are set.

  In this case, when viewing the viewing angle adjustment area 97 of the display surface 94 from the upper side, the incident angle range in which the upper display area 102 is visible and the viewing angle adjustment area 97 of the display surface 94 from the lower side. In this symbol display device 81, the former is “25 ° to 55 °” and the latter is “−55 ° to 55 °”. However, the specific range is arbitrary as long as each display of the multi-view display described later on the symbol display device 81 can be seen well from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10. .

  As described above, the liquid crystal display unit 90 is controlled so that the upper display region 102 and the lower display region 103 are alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction, so that the lower display region 103 is interposed therebetween. The distance between the adjacent upper display areas 102 and the distance between the adjacent lower display areas 103 across the upper display area 102 can be suppressed to one pixel. Thereby, in the configuration that enables multi-view display in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, each image is displayed over the entire viewing angle adjustment region 97, and blanks generated inside each image are made as conspicuous as possible. It becomes possible to eliminate.

  In the configuration in which the parallax barrier panel 93 is provided to perform multi-view display, the luminance of the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is higher on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 than the upper non-adjustment region 95 and the lower non-adjustment region 96. There is concern about the decline. Then, there is a concern that the uniformity of luminance on the display surface 94 is impaired. On the other hand, in the symbol display device 81, a transmission amount adjustment panel 106 is provided as a transmission amount adjustment means (transmission amount adjustment unit) between the liquid crystal display unit 90 and the rear polarizing film 91.

  The transmission amount adjustment panel 106 is provided so as to face the entire back surface of the liquid crystal display unit 90. The transmission amount adjustment panel 106 has a field of view of the amount of light emitted from the backlight 92 to the region corresponding to the upper non-adjustment region 95 and the region corresponding to the lower non-adjustment region 96 in the liquid crystal display unit 90. The light corresponding to the non-adjustment areas 95 and 96 in the transmission amount adjustment panel 106 and the area corresponding to the viewing angle adjustment area 97 are light so that the amount of light applied to the area corresponding to the angle adjustment area 97 is smaller. Are formed to have different transmittances. For example, by combining panels with different transparency, the light transmittance is different between both ends in the vertical direction and the region between them. The light transmittance of each region in the transmission amount adjustment panel 106 is the same as that of the non-adjustment regions 95 and 96 and the viewing angle adjustment region 97 when the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is viewed from the front. Alternatively, they are set to be substantially the same. As a result, in the configuration in which the parallax barrier panel 93 is provided, the uniformity of brightness on the display surface 94 is not impaired.

  The transmission amount adjustment panel 106 is not necessarily provided between the liquid crystal display unit 90 and the rear polarizing film 91. For example, between the rear polarizing film 91 and the backlight 92, It may be provided between the liquid crystal display unit 90 and the parallax barrier panel 93 or in front of the parallax barrier panel 93. Further, the transmission amount adjustment panel 106 may be omitted.

  A display control device 82 is provided behind the symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. The display control device 82 includes a display control board that controls display of the symbol display device 81 based on information (command) input from the sound emission control device 66, and a board box 82a that houses the display control board. . The substrate box 82a is made of a synthetic resin material having transparency so that the display control substrate accommodated can be visually recognized from the outside. The display control device 82 is fixed to the rear surface of the symbol display device 81 in a detachable state, whereby the symbol display device 81 and the display control device 82 are integrated.

  The symbol display device 81 in which the display control device 82 is integrated is fixed to the back surface of the game board 33 through the display-side support mechanism 83, and the display surface 94 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33 a of the game board 33. Is visible. In this case, the center frame 41 disposed so as to surround the periphery of the opening 33a is provided with a transparent plate 107 so as to close the opening 33a (see FIGS. 6 and 14). The transparent plate 107 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material, but may be formed of a colorless and transparent glass material. The provision of the transparent plate 107 prevents a game ball flowing down the game area from entering the symbol display device 81 side through the opening 33a. The transparent plate 107 is formed in a plate shape having the same or substantially the same thickness dimension, and the plate surface is parallel or substantially parallel to the board surface of the game board 33.

  Next, the configuration of the display side support mechanism 83 will be described in detail. The following description will be given with reference to FIG. 11 as appropriate in addition to FIGS. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the symbol display unit 38 is viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIG. 7 and the like, the display side support mechanism 83 includes a pair of display side base plates 111 and 112. These display-side base plates 111 and 112 are both relatively hard metal plates, and are fixed to the back surface of the game board 33 and are provided to stand rearward from the back surface of the game board 33. The pair of display-side base plates 111 and 112 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction, and the symbol display device in which the display control device 82 is integrated in a space secured between the display-side base plates 111 and 112. 81 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and the like, side plates 113 and 114 constituting support portions for the display side base plates 111 and 112 are provided on both sides of the symbol display device 81. Each of the side plates 113 and 114 is provided over the entire corresponding side portion of the symbol display device 81, and shaft members 115 and 116 extending toward the corresponding display side base plates 111 and 112 are provided at the lower end portions. It is fixed. These shaft members 115 and 116 extend in the left-right direction so as to be positioned on the same straight line, and are rotatably supported by the corresponding display-side base plates 111 and 112, respectively. In this case, the positions where the shaft members 115 and 116 are supported are positions biased to the back side of the game board 33 in the display-side base plates 111 and 112.

  An angle changing motor 117 for applying a rotational force to the shaft member 115 supported by the display side base plate 111 is fixed to one of the display side base plates 111 and 112. . The angle changing motor 117 is electrically connected to the display control device 82, and rotates the output shaft 117a in a predetermined direction and the opposite direction by receiving a drive signal from the display control device 82. On the other hand, when the drive signal is not received from the display control device 82, the rotational position of the output shaft 117a is held. The angle changing motor 117 is fixed to the outer plate surface of the display side base plate 111 in a state where the output shaft 117a protrudes from the display side base plate 111 to the symbol display device 81 side.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the first gear 118 is fixed to the output shaft 117a of the angle changing motor 117, and the first gear 118 rotates as the output shaft 117a rotates. The rotational force of the first gear 118 is transmitted to the fourth gear 121 via the second gear 119 and the third gear 120 that are rotatably supported by the display-side base plate 111. While the first gear 118, the second gear 119, and the third gear 120 are circular, the fourth gear 121 is formed in a fan shape, and the shaft member 115 is fixed to the center portion of the arc. In this case, the first gear 118, the second gear 119, and the third gear 120 rotate at positions held by the support shafts, respectively, while the fourth gear 121 is integrated with the symbol display device 81 around the support shaft. Rotate.

  Although the first to fourth gears 118 to 121 are accommodated in the cover member 122 as shown in FIG. 7, the cover member 122 is omitted in FIGS. 8 and 11 for convenience of explanation. Moreover, in FIG. 11, the display side base board 111 is shown with a dashed-two dotted line for convenience of explanation.

  When the angle changing motor 117 operates and the output shaft 117a rotates, the rotational force is transmitted to the shaft member 115 via the first gear 118, the second gear 119, the third gear 120, and the fourth gear 121. . Thereby, the direction of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is changed in accordance with the operation of the angle changing motor 117. In this case, since the second gear 119, the third gear 120, and the fourth gear 121 have gear portions with a large number of teeth with respect to the first gear 118, the rotation of the output shaft 117a of the angle changing motor 117 is performed. When the rotation amount of the fourth gear 121 with respect to the amount is compared, the rotation amount of the fourth gear 121 is smaller than the rotation amount of the output shaft 117a. As a result, torque is increased.

  Further, a third gear 120 is arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the fourth gear 121 that rotates integrally when the symbol display device 81 rotates. Thereby, transmission of force when rotating the symbol display device 81 is performed satisfactorily, and furthermore, the display surface 94 is held well in an inclined state. The number of gears 118 to 121 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. Furthermore, the gears 118 to 121 are not provided, and the output shaft 117a of the angle changing motor 117 is directly connected to the shaft member 115. It may be.

  The details of the orientation of the display surface 94 will be described later. As the angle change motor 117 is driven, the display surface 94 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33 and faces the front. The pachinko machine 10 can be switched between a large hitting inclination state and a reach inclination state that are inclined obliquely upward. In this case, the display-side base plate 111 on which the angle changing motor 117 and the like are installed is provided with angle detection sensors 123 to 125 in a one-to-one correspondence with the rotation position where the symbol display device 81 is switched.

  The angle detection sensors 123 to 125 are all optical sensors having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. As shown in FIG. 8, the angle detection sensors 123 to 125 are provided so as to protrude sideways on one side plate 113 provided in the symbol display device 81. Detection of the symbol display device 81 is performed by the sensor cut unit 126 thus blocked between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. In FIG. 8, only the angle detection sensor 123 corresponding to the initial state is shown for convenience of explanation. The detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125 are input to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 grasps the rotation state of the symbol display device 81 based on the input results, and based on the grasp results. The angle changing motor 117 is driven.

  Next, the reflection unit 84 and the reflection side support mechanism 85 will be described.

  As described above, the viewing angle adjustment region 97 enabling multi-view display is set on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81, and the display surface 94 is directed obliquely upward as the angle changing motor 117 is driven. It will be in the state. In this case, an image (see FIG. 10B) displayed in the lower display area 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 in the viewing angle adjustment area 97 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, but is displayed in the upper display area 102. The displayed image is not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the symbol display unit 38 has a reflection unit 84 that reflects the image toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 so that the image displayed in the upper display area 102 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 11, the reflection unit 84 includes a reflection mirror 132 having a reflection surface 131 on the surface, and a metal mirror support 133 that supports the reflection mirror 132. The reflective surface 131 has a planar shape that is flush with the entire surface or substantially the entire surface. The mirror support 133 includes a base portion 134 that is superimposed on the back surface of the reflection mirror 132 and to which the reflection mirror 132 is fixed, and a pair of flange portions 135 and 136 that stand rearward from both left and right ends of the base portion 134. ing. The flange portions 135 and 136 are provided over substantially the entire length of the base portion 134, and are provided so as to extend below the base portion 134.

  The reflection unit 84 is provided on the back surface of the game board 33 via the reflection-side support mechanism 85, and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection mirror 132 faces the front of the pachinko machine 10 and is on the back side of the game board 33. It is arranged above the symbol display device 81. The reflection side support mechanism 85 includes a pair of reflection side base plates 137 and 138 as shown in FIG. These reflection-side base plates 137 and 138 are both relatively hard metal plates, and are fixed to the back surface of the game board 33 and provided to stand rearward from the back surface of the game board 33. The pair of reflection side base plates 137 and 138 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the left-right direction, and a reflection unit 84 is provided in a space secured between the reflection side base plates 137 and 138.

  The reflection-side base plates 137 and 138 are respectively formed with guide grooves 139 and 140 having the same shape. The guide grooves 139 and 140 are slightly curved from the lower ends of the first guide areas 139a and 140a extending in the longitudinal direction while slightly bending in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Second guide regions 139b and 140b extending downward and inclined, and the first guide regions 139a and 140a and the second guide regions 139b and 140b communicate with each other.

  In correspondence with the guide grooves 139 and 140 of the reflection-side base plates 137 and 138, the flange portions 135 and 136 of the mirror support 133 in the reflection unit 84 are identical to each other as shown in FIG. Upper connection portions 135a and 136a are provided so as to be positioned on a straight line. These upper connection portions 135a and 136a are connected to the guide grooves 139 and 140 of the corresponding reflection side base plates 137 and 138, respectively. Are connected. In this case, the connecting member 141 includes a bolt and a nut, and the connection by the connecting member 141 is performed so that the upper connecting portions 135a and 136a can move along the guide grooves 139 and 140. The connection of the upper connecting portions 135a and 136a to the guide grooves 139 and 140 by the connecting member 141 is performed so as to have a predetermined play, but the connection is performed without the predetermined play. Also good.

  Further, lower connecting portions 135b and 136b are provided in areas extending downward from the base portion 134 in the flange portions 135 and 136 of the mirror support 133 so as to be positioned on the same straight line in the left-right direction. The lower connecting portions 135b and 136b are connected to the side plates 113 and 114 provided in the symbol display device 81 by using a connecting member 142. In this case, the connection member 142 includes a bolt and a nut, and the connection by the connection member 142 is performed so that the reflection unit 84 can rotate with respect to the symbol display device 81.

  The reflection unit 84 is connected to the reflection side base plates 137 and 138 and the side plates 113 and 114 of the symbol display device 81, so that the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is driven by the driving of the angle changing motor 117. In the tilted state, the reflecting unit 84 moves so that the reflecting surface 131 of the reflecting mirror 132 is tilted following the tilted state.

  In addition, the symbol display device 81 includes a unit that actually performs display including the liquid crystal display unit 90 and a control board that performs display in the unit, and the display control device 82 is integrated, while reflecting. Since the display unit 84 has only the reflection mirror 132 for display, the reflection unit 84 is lighter than the symbol display device 81. In this case, the angle can be changed favorably by directly driving the symbol display device 81 having a relatively large weight by the angle changing motor 117 and causing the reflecting unit 84 having a relatively small weight to follow. .

  Next, the manner in which the orientation of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 is changed as the angle change motor 117 is driven will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 12A to 12C and FIGS. 13A to 13C, the orientation of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 with the driving of the angle change motor 117 is shown. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that it is changed, Fig.12 (a)-(c) shows the state which looked at the symbol display unit 38 from the side, and Fig.13 (a)-(c) is symbol display. The state which looked at the unit 38 from diagonally back is shown.

  Here, as already described, the angle changing motor 117 holds the rotational position of the output shaft 117a in a state where it does not receive a drive signal from the display control device 82, and maintains the rotational position of the output shaft 117a. Thus, the rotation angle of the symbol display device 81 is maintained. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of angles, specifically three types of angles, are set as the rotation angles of the symbol display device 81 to be held. The follow-up position is set. In other words, the position changing means including the angle changing motor 117, the gears 118 to 121, and the guide grooves 139, 140 of the reflection side base plates 137, 138 are the rotation angle (rotation position) of the symbol display device 81 and In addition to the function of changing the follow-up position of the reflection unit 84, it also has a function of holding the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 at each rotation angle and each follow-up position.

  Specifically, the angle changing motor 117 is configured such that the rotational position of the output shaft 117a is held in a state where no driving signal is received from the display control device 82 by hydraulic pressure or pneumatic pressure. In the gears 118 to 121, there is friction at the meshing portions of the gears 118 to 121 so that the rotation angle of the symbol display device 81 is maintained in a state where a drive signal is not output from the display control device 82 to the angle change motor 117. Further, in the reflection-side base plates 137 and 138, corner portions that change from the first guide regions 139a and 140a to the second guide regions 139b and 140b and the rear ends of the second guide regions 139b and 140b are used. Guide grooves 139 and 140 are formed so that the reflection unit 84 can be auxiliary-held.

  Note that the configuration for holding the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 at each rotation angle and each follow-up position is not limited to the above, and the configuration of holding the angle changing motor 117 by hydraulic pressure or the like is not acceptable. It is good also as a structure which hold | maintains by the friction in the meshing part of each gear 118-121, and the auxiliary | assistant holding | maintenance in the guide grooves 139,140. Further, the friction at the meshing portions of the gears 118 to 121 may be set so as not to have a holding function, and may be held by holding by the hydraulic pressure in the angle changing motor 117 and auxiliary holding in the guide grooves 139 and 140. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where an auxiliary | assistant holding function does not act in the guide grooves 139,140. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which replaces with the structure regarding the said holding | maintenance, or provides the drive part for holding | maintenance. As the drive unit for holding, an electric actuator such as a solenoid is provided corresponding to each rotation position and each following position, and the corresponding electric actuator is driven and controlled by a display control device, etc. It is good also as a structure which enables the holding | maintenance in a position.

  Hereinafter, three types of states held for the rotation angle of the symbol display device 81 and the follow-up position of the reflection unit 84 will be described. First, the initial state will be described.

  In the initial state, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 13A, the symbol display device 81 is held so that the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33. Yes. In this case, as described above, the shaft member 115 provided in the symbol display device 81 is supported at a position biased to the back side of the game board 33 on the display side base plate 111, and the display surface of the symbol display device 81 is displayed. 94 opposes the rear opening surface of the opening 33a. Since the rear opening surface is covered with the transparent plate 107 as described above, it can be said that the display surface 94 faces the transparent plate 107. It can also be said that the display surface 94 faces the transparent plate 107 so as to be parallel or substantially parallel to the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14.

  The upper connecting portion 135a of the reflection unit 84 is located at the upper end of the first guide region 139a in the guide groove 139, and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33. In this case, the entire reflecting surface 131 is above the display surface 94, and substantially the entire reflecting surface 131 is above the opening 33a of the game board 33, so that the reflecting surface 131 is generally visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is impossible. That is, in the initial state, the display surface 94 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33 as described above, and it is not necessary to reflect the image of the display surface 94 by the reflection surface 131. The display surface 94 is disposed at a position where the visibility of the display surface 94 is not lowered and is substantially invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Assuming a configuration in which the reflective surface 131 is not visually recognizable in the initial state, there is a possibility that something unrelated to the display on the display surface 94 will be displayed on the reflective surface 131. Such inconvenience is suppressed.

  Next, the big hit inclination state will be described.

  In the initial state, a drive signal for tilting operation is output from the display control device 82 to the angle changing motor 117, whereby the output shaft 117a of the angle changing motor 117 rotates in the direction for tilting operation. Then, the rotational force for the tilting operation of the output shaft 117a is transmitted in the order of the first gear 118 → the second gear 119 → the third gear 120 → the fourth gear 121, and the rotational force is transmitted to the symbol display device 81. The The symbol display device 81 is rotated so as to incline backward with the shaft member 115 provided so as to extend in the left-right direction at the lower end when the rotational force for the tilting operation is transmitted. The angle control motor 117 is driven and controlled by the display control device 82 until the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is tilted 35 degrees backward with respect to the game board 33. This state is a jackpot slope state. The big hit inclination state is switched when the big hit state is reached, and the state is maintained during the big hit state.

  In this case, when the drive signal for the tilting operation is output, the display control device 82 specifies that the current state is the initial state based on the detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125, and outputs based on the specification result. The drive signal to be driven is the drive signal for the tilting operation and the output duration of the drive signal is specified.

  In the big hit inclination state, as shown in FIG. 12B and FIG. 13B, the reflection unit 84 corresponds to the display surface 94 being inclined 35 degrees backward with respect to the game board 33. Follow, and the upper connecting portion 135a of the reflection unit 84 moves to the lower end of the first guide region 139a in the guide groove 139. At this position, the reflection unit 131 is a position where the reflection surface 131 can be visually recognized through the opening 33a, and the reflection unit 84 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 so that the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle. It will be in the state where it inclined down toward the back. In this case, it can be said that the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are inclined to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14.

  Next, the reach inclination state will be described.

  In the initial state or the big hitting inclination state, the display control device 82 outputs a driving signal for the inclination operation to the angle changing motor 117, so that the symbol display device 81 extends in the left-right direction at the lower end as described above. The shaft member 115 provided on the shaft is rotated so as to incline backward with the rotation shaft as a rotation shaft. The angle control motor 117 is driven and controlled by the display control device 82 until the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is inclined 45 degrees backward with respect to the game board 33. This state is a reach inclination state. The reach tilt state is switched when the predetermined reach variation display is performed, and the state is maintained during the predetermined reach variation display.

  In outputting the drive signal for the tilting operation in this case, the display control device 82 specifies that the current state is the initial state or the big hit tilt state based on the detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125, and the specifying result Based on the above, it is specified that the drive signal to be output is a drive signal for tilting operation and the output duration of the drive signal.

  In the pachinko machine 10, there is no situation where the symbol display device 81 is rotated from the big hit inclination state to the reach inclination state, but the symbol display unit 38 is configured to be able to perform the operation. Yes.

  In the reach inclination state, as shown in FIGS. 12C and 13C, the reflection unit 84 corresponds to the display surface 94 being inclined 45 degrees backward with respect to the game board 33. Follow, and the upper connecting portion 135a of the reflection unit 84 moves to the rear end of the second guide region 139b in the guide groove 139. At this position, the reflection unit 131 is a position where the reflection surface 131 can be visually recognized through the opening 33a, and the reflection unit 84 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 so that the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle. It will be in the state where it inclined down toward the back. In the reach inclination state, the illustration is omitted, but the rear end portion of the symbol display device 81 is located close to the protective cover portion 74 in the back pack 71. In this case, it can also be said that the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are inclined to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14.

  As described above, the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is maintained at a right angle or a substantially right angle in both the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state. This is because when the display surface 94 is switched from the initial state to the reach inclination state while the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is held at a right angle or a substantially right angle, the upper connection of the reflection unit 84 is performed. This is because the guide groove 139 is formed in accordance with the trajectory through which the portion 135a passes.

  Here, as shown to Fig.12 (a), in the initial state, the display surface 94 of the symbol display apparatus 81 opposes in the position near the rear side opening surface of the opening part 33a. On the other hand, in the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state, the symbol display device 81 is inclined backward, and the angle of the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 with respect to the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is a right angle or Since it is substantially perpendicular, the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131 are separated from the transparent plate 107. Then, there is a concern that the back side of the game board 33 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the space.

  On the other hand, the symbol display unit 38 includes a pair of shielding plates 143 and 144 as shown in FIGS. The shielding plates 143 and 144 are disposed between the pair of display-side base plates 111 and 112 so as to be separated in the left-right direction so as to sandwich the symbol display device 81 therebetween. The shielding plates 143 and 144 are provided to stand from the back of the game board 33 toward the back of the pachinko machine 10, and as shown in FIGS. 12 (c) and 13 (c), the symbol display device 81 is a pachinko machine. 10 Even in the reach inclination state that is the most inclined toward the rear, the space between the rear opening surface of the opening 33a, the display surface 94, and the reflection surface 131 is lateral to the opening 33a. It is formed so as to close. Then, in the inclined state for reach, the separated space is closed on the side of the opening 33a, so that the same shielding plates 143 and 144 can be used for big hits as shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 13 (b). Even in the inclined state, it is similarly blocked. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the back side of the game board 33 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the spacing space in the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG.12 (c) and FIG.13 (c), in the reach inclination state, the upper end of the reflection unit 84 and the rear side opening surface of the opening part 33a are spaced apart. Then, there is a concern that the back side of the game board 33 can be visually recognized through the separated space. On the other hand, for example, a movable shielding plate is provided on the symbol display unit 38, and in the reach inclination state, the shielding plate shields between the upper end of the reflection unit 84 and the rear opening surface of the opening 33a. It is good also as a structure. However, the shielding plate needs to be provided so as not to hinder the movement of the reflecting unit 84 between the initial state and the reach inclination state.

  Next, the case of switching from the big hitting inclination state or the reaching inclination state toward the initial state side will be described.

  When the drive signal for the return operation is output from the display control device 82 to the angle change motor 117 in the big hit inclination state or the reach inclination state, the output shaft 117a of the angle change motor 117 rotates in the return operation direction. To do. Then, the rotational force for the return operation of the output shaft 117a is transmitted in the order of the first gear 118 → the second gear 119 → the third gear 120 → the fourth gear 121, and the rotational force is transmitted to the symbol display device 81. The The symbol display device 81 is rotated so that the shaft member 115, 116 provided so as to extend in the left-right direction at the lower end portion of the symbol display device 81 is rotated forward. To do.

  In the case of switching from the reach tilt state to the big hit tilt state, the display control device 82 causes the angle changing motor to be in a state where the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is tilted 35 degrees backward with respect to the game board 33. 117 is driven and controlled, and the reflection unit 84 moves so as to follow this operation. Thereby, it switches to the slope state for big hits. Further, when switching from the big hit inclination state or the reach inclination state to the initial state, the angle control motor 117 is driven and controlled by the display control device 82 until the angle of the display surface 94 with respect to the game board 33 becomes 0 degrees. At the same time, the reflection unit 84 moves so as to follow this operation. Thereby, it switches to an initial state.

  Note that the display control device 82 outputs the drive signal for the return operation and the output duration of the drive signal is based on the detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125. This is the same as when a signal is output.

  Next, the relationship with the multi-view display in the symbol display unit 38 in the initial state, the big hit inclination state, and the reach inclination state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode in the initial state, FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode in the big hit inclination state, and FIG. 14C is for reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the display in an inclination state.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, in order to set the eye height position of the player with respect to the opening 33a of the game board 33 to be a predetermined one, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with designation means for designating the eye height position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, one height position designation portion 145 is provided to each of the left and right side frame portions of the roof unit 42 in the center frame 41.

  The height position specifying portion 145 is provided by coloring the side frame portion, but is not limited to this, and is provided by forming predetermined unevenness on the side frame portion. May be. When the player adjusts the eye height position to the height position specifying portion 145, the eye height position of the player becomes near the center in the vertical direction of the opening 33a, and the player moves the opening 33a from the front. It will be visually recognized. For example, in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, a chair on which a player sits may be configured to be adjustable in height. Further, the height position specifying unit 145 may be omitted.

  In the following description, the height position of the player's eyes is the position specified by the height position specifying unit 145, that is, the state where the player is viewing the opening 33a from the front.

  In the initial state, as shown in FIG. 14 (a), the display surface 94 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33, and substantially the entire display surface 94 excluding a part on the lower end side is opened through the opening 33a. The pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front. The player's line of sight is directed perpendicular to the display surface 94, and the player's line of sight is also directed perpendicularly to the viewing angle adjustment region 97. In a situation where the player's line of sight is directed vertically with respect to the viewing angle adjustment area 97, each image of the multi-view display is individually viewed even if multi-view display is performed in the viewing angle adjustment area 97. However, since the state where the images are mixed is visually recognized, the multi-view display is not performed.

  Further, as described above, substantially the entire display surface 94 excluding a part on the lower end side is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the image is displayed in a unified state in all of the upper non-adjustment area 95, the lower non-adjustment area 96, and the viewing angle adjustment area 97. As already described, in the initial state, substantially the entire reflecting surface 131 is above the opening 33a of the game board 33, and the reflecting surface 131 is substantially invisible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the big hitting inclination state, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display surface 94 is inclined at 35 degrees as the first inclination angle with respect to the game board 33, and the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94. Is a right angle or a substantially right angle. In this state, not only the display surface 94 but also the reflective surface 131 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a.

  Further, the position of the lower end portion of the reflection surface 131 coincides with the boundary portion between the upper non-adjustment region 95 and the viewing angle adjustment region 97 on the display surface 94, and further, the lower end portion of the reflection surface 131 is displayed at the position. It is in contact with or close to the surface 94. In this case, when the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are viewed through the opening 33a, no gap is generated between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131. However, the upper non-adjustment area 95 of the display surface 94 is hidden by the reflection unit 84. That is, in the large hitting inclination state, the lower non-adjustment region 96 and the viewing angle adjustment region 97 on the display surface 94 and the substantially entire reflection surface 131 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface 94 is 35 degrees wider than that in the initial state, and the player's line of sight with respect to the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is also 35 degrees wider than in the initial state. In addition, the player's line of sight with respect to the reflective surface 131 is also 35 degrees, and the viewing angle adjustment region 97 of the display surface 94 is reflected on the reflective surface 131 at this angle. In this case, the region projected on the reflecting surface 131 is the viewing angle adjustment region 97 and does not include the lower non-adjustment region 96. However, in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, a part on the lower non-adjustment region 96 side is not included in the region projected on the reflection surface 131.

  By performing multi-view display in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, an image displayed in the lower display region 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 is visually recognized with a line of sight directed directly to the display surface 94, and the liquid crystal display unit The image displayed in the upper display area 102 of the 90 is visually recognized by a line of sight directed toward the reflecting surface 131. That is, with the display surface 94 as a reference, an image when the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is viewed from diagonally below and an image when the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is viewed from diagonally above are directly viewed from the opening 33a side. An image that cannot be displayed is reflected from the reflecting surface 131 so that it can be viewed from the opening 33a side.

  In addition, since the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle as described above, the reflection surface 131 reflects from the reflection surface 131 and is viewed from the reflection surface 131 when the display surface 94 is viewed. When the player's line of sight is extended to the rear of the reflecting surface 131 by the distance that the light travels to the display surface 94, the extended position is included in the surface extended upward with the display surface 94 being flush. . That is, when viewed from the player, the image reflected by the reflecting surface 131 is viewed as if the display surface 94 is displayed at a position extended upward on the same plane. In this case, the vertical dimension of the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player is larger than the vertical dimension of the opening 33a. Incidentally, in the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player, the lower non-adjustment area 96 of the display surface 94 is the closest side to the player.

  In the reach inclination state, as shown in FIG. 14C, the display surface 94 is inclined at 45 degrees as the second inclination angle with respect to the game board 33, and the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94. Is a right angle or a substantially right angle. In this state, not only the display surface 94 but also the reflective surface 131 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a, as in the large hitting inclined state. Note that the position of the reflective surface 131 with respect to each region 95 to 97 of the display surface 94 is also the same as that in the large hitting inclined state. When the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131 are viewed through the opening 33a, the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131 are displayed. The lower non-adjustment area 96 and the viewing angle adjustment area 97 on the display surface 94 and the substantially entire reflection surface 131 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface 94 is 45 degrees wider than that in the initial state, and the player's line of sight with respect to the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is also 45 degrees wider than in the initial state. Also, the player's line of sight with respect to the reflective surface 131 is 45 degrees, and the viewing angle adjustment region 97 of the display surface 94 is projected on the reflective surface 131 at this angle. In this case, the region projected on the reflecting surface 131 is the viewing angle adjustment region 97 and does not include the lower non-adjustment region 96. In addition, unlike the big hit inclination state, in the reach inclination state, the area projected on the reflecting surface 131 coincides with the whole or substantially the entire viewing angle adjustment area 97.

  By performing the multi-view display in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, the image displayed in the lower display region 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 can be viewed with the line of sight directly directed to the display surface 94, as in the large hitting tilt state. While being visually recognized, an image displayed in the upper display area 102 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 is visually recognized by a line of sight directed toward the reflective surface 131. Further, similarly to the big hitting tilt state, the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the image reflected on the reflection surface 131 is displayed on the display surface. It is visually recognized that 94 is displayed at a position extended upward on the same plane.

  In this case, as described above, in the big hitting inclination state, a part of the viewing angle adjustment region 97 on the lower non-adjustment region 96 side is not included in the region projected on the reflection surface 131, but the reach In the tilted state, the entire viewing angle adjustment region 97 is included in the region projected on the reflection surface 131. Thereby, in the reach inclination state, the display area visually recognized by the player is enlarged as compared with the big hit inclination state. Note that, in the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player, the lower non-adjustment area 96 of the display surface 94 is the side closest to the player, as in the big hitting inclined state.

  Here, FIG. 15 shows a situation in which the player visually recognizes the multi-view display from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10 in the situation where the reach is in an inclined state. As shown in FIG. 15, the player can visually recognize the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131 through the window panel 62 and the transparent plate 107 by visually recognizing the window panel 62 from a predetermined position. Then, the incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the display surface 94 is included in the incident angle range that allows the lower display area 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 to be visible, so that the lower display area 103 The displayed image becomes visible. On the other hand, since the upper display area 102 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 is not included in the range of the incident angle that allows viewing, the image in the upper display area 102 cannot be viewed even when the display surface 94 is viewed. .

  Further, when the incident angle of the player's line of sight with respect to the reflective surface 131 is specified as the incident angle on the display surface 94 by being reflected by the reflective surface 131, the above-described upper display region 102 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 is visually recognized. By being included in the range of possible incident angles, the image displayed in the upper display area 102 can be viewed through the reflecting surface 131. On the other hand, since the lower display area 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 described above is not included in the range of the incident angle that allows viewing, the image in the lower display area 103 can be viewed even when the reflection surface 131 is viewed. I can't.

  As described above, the images in the display areas 102 and 103 are visually recognized from the display surface 94 from the predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10, and the other is visually recognized through the reflective surface 131. Further, as described above, since the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle, the reflection is reflected on the line of sight when the display surface 94 is viewed by being reflected by the reflection surface 131. When the player's line of sight is extended to the rear of the reflecting surface 131 by the distance that the light travels from the surface 131 to the display surface 94, the extended position is the surface extended upward with the display surface 94 being flush. included. That is, when viewed from the player, the image reflected by the reflecting surface 131 is viewed as if the display surface 94 is displayed at a position extended upward on the same plane. The predetermined position is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 15, and is arbitrary as long as the multi-view display can be satisfactorily viewed through the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131.

  The symbol display device 81 has the brightness when the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is directly viewed from the front of the opening 33a and the front of the opening 33a in at least the reach inclination state of the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state. A parallax barrier panel 93 is provided so that the luminance when the image reflected on the reflecting surface 131 is viewed is the same. That is, with reference to the display surface 94, the luminance when the upper display area 102 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 is viewed from a position obliquely above 45 degrees and the lower display area 103 of the liquid crystal display section 90 are positions obliquely below 45 degrees. The parallax barrier panel 93 is provided so that the former luminance is higher when compared with the luminance when viewed from above. The difference in luminance is substantially the same as the amount of decrease in luminance due to reflection at the reflecting surface 131. As a result, a luminance difference is less likely to occur between the image when the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is directly visually recognized and the image reflected by the reflecting surface 131, and for the player, the enlarged display region. It becomes possible to visually recognize the image without a sense of incongruity.

  As described above, the symbol display device 81 is arranged so that the display surface 94 is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state, and the reflection surface 131 is disposed above the display surface 94. Since the reflection unit 84 is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to secure a large display area as compared with the opening 33a. A relatively large display area can be secured without increasing the size. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the size in the front-rear direction of the symbol display unit 38 in a state where a large display area is secured as compared with the opening 33a.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 16, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  A CPU 152 is mounted on a main control board 151 provided in the main controller 65. The CPU 152 includes a ROM 153 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 152 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 153 is executed. A certain RAM 154 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated.

  The CPU 152 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the CPU 152 are a power failure monitoring board 155 provided in the main controller 65, a payout controller 77, and other switches (not shown). In this case, a power supply and launch control device 78 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 155, and power is supplied to the CPU 152 via the power failure monitoring board 155. In addition, as a part of the switch group, a plurality of detection sensors provided in a ball entry unit such as the operation port 36 and the variable winning device 35 are connected, and the CPU 152 of the main controller 65 enters the ball entry unit. A determination is made. In addition, the CPU 152 executes the jackpot occurrence determination based on the entrance to the operation port 36 in the entrance portion.

  Here, an electrical configuration for determining whether or not the jackpot is generated by the CPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the game, the CPU 152 uses lots of counter information to perform jackpot lottery, setting the emission color of the first specific display unit 51, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 81, and the like. A jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as a promiscuous jackpot or a normal jackpot, and a reach random number counter used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 81 changes and changes. C3, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a first variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection of the symbol display device 81, and the first specific display unit 51. A second variation type key for determining a period for switching colors and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 81. A pointer CS2, is set to be used and off the symbol counter C4 is used to set the combination of off-design.

  Among these, the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 are loop counters that each add 1 to the previous value and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the off symbol counter C4 is configured such that the register value is added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 152, and as a result, the numerical value changes randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 154. The RAM 154 is provided with a holding ball storage buffer composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball to the operation port 36 is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series according to the entry history.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the big hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 154 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation port 36.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type counter C2 determines whether the probability change state or the normal state is set after the jackpot is finished. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 154 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation port 36.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 154 at the timing when the game ball enters the operation port 36.

  For example, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, reaches a maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. The second variation type counter CS2 includes, for example, Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0.

  The display mode of the symbol display device 81 such as the reach type and other rough symbol variation modes is determined by the first variation type counter CS1. In this case, as a part of various reach, a special reach for performing reach variation display in a state where the symbol display unit 38 is changed from the initial state to the reach inclination state is included. Further, the switching display time as a period for switching the color displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2. This switching display time corresponds to the symbol fluctuation display time of the symbol display device 81. Both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired at the time of starting the switching of the color displayed on the first specific display unit 51 and determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 81.

  The off symbol counter C4 is used to determine a stop symbol in the left row symbol, middle row symbol, and right column symbol when the big hit lottery is missed, and a predetermined range of counter values is prepared. The out symbol counter C4 is updated in the normal process, and the value of the out symbol counter C4 is stored in either the front / rear out-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 154, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, or the complete out-of symbol symbol buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the start of symbol variation, one of the buffer values of the front / rear reach symbol buffer, the reach / reject symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and the completely out symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the power failure monitoring board 155, the payout control device 77, and the sound emission control device 66 are connected to the output side of the CPU 152. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the result of determining whether or not the player has entered the pitching unit. Various commands such as a change start command and a jackpot start command, which will be described later, are output to the sound emission control device 66. In addition, a drive unit or the like provided in the variable winning device 35 is connected to the output side of the CPU 152. In the big hit state, drive control of the driving unit is executed, and the variable winning device 35 is opened and closed. .

  The power failure monitoring board 155 relays between the main control board 151 and the power supply and launch control device 78, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76.

  The power source and launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 151, the payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is indicated by a double line arrow. Supply through the route. The power supply and launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 57, and the game ball launch mechanism 57 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 66 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the speaker unit and the light emitting unit provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control board 151.

  Here, the electrical configuration of the display control device 82 will be described in detail.

  The display control device 82 includes a display control board 161 on which a CPU 162, a program ROM 163, a work RAM 164, a video display processor (VDP) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167 are mounted individually as chips. In addition, you may form the chip | tip compositely with arbitrary combinations.

  The CPU 162 of the display control board 161 inputs a symbol display command (variation start command, jackpot start command, jackpot end command, etc.) output from the main controller 65 and output via the sound emission controller 66, Control of the VDP 165 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 165) is performed by analyzing the input command or performing predetermined arithmetic processing based on the input command.

  The program ROM 163 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 162 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 164 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags and the like used when the CPU 162 executes various programs.

  The VDP 165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device 168 as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 81. Since the VDP 165 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 165 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the CPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data to be stored in the video RAM 167 from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 81 to display the display data.

  The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, and the display content of the symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 167. The character ROM 166 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 81. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 is stored in the character ROM 166.

  The symbol display device 81 includes an image processing device 168, and the image processing device 168 drives and controls the liquid crystal display unit 90 based on a drive signal input from the display control device 82. Thereby, the liquid crystal display unit 90 operates so that a predetermined image is displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81.

  In addition, a plurality of angle detection sensors 123 to 125 provided in the symbol display unit 38 are electrically connected to the input side of the display control board 161, and the symbol is similarly connected to the output side of the display control board 161. An angle changing motor 117 is electrically connected to the display unit 38. In the CPU 162 of the display control board 161, the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 of the symbol display unit 38 are in the initial state, the big hit inclination state, or the reach inclination based on the detection signals input from the angle detection sensors 123 to 125. When specifying which of the states, and switching between these states, the angle change motor 117 is driven and controlled based on the detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125.

  Next, various controls executed by the CPU 152 of the main controller 65 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the following description of the various controls executed by the CPU 152 of the main control device 65, the description will be made focusing on the processing related to the jackpot lottery, the processing for teaching the lottery result to the player, and the processing in the jackpot state. The processing of the CPU 152 includes at least a normal process and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (for example, 2 msec) so as to be executed by interrupting the normal process. The interrupt process will be described, and then the normal process will be described.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S101, a signal reading process from various sensors or the like is executed. Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In the subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Then, after executing the start winning process in step S104, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  In the start winning process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, first, in step S <b> 201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the operation port 36. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the operation port 36, in the subsequent step S202, the number N of operation reserved balls of the first specific display unit 51 and the symbol display device 81 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not. The process proceeds to step S203 on the condition that there is a ball entering the operation port 36 and the number N of operation reservation balls is N <4, and the operation reservation ball number N is incremented by one. In subsequent step S204, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are stored in the first area of the free storage area of the reserved ball storage buffer of the RAM 154.

  Next, normal processing will be described using the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is executed after the main process that is executed when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S301, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is output to each control board on the slave side. In the subsequent step S302, updating of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. In a succeeding step S303, the off symbol counter C4 is updated. In the update process of the out symbol counter C4, first, the out symbol counter C4 is updated, and the updated value of the out symbol counter C4 becomes a front / rear reach reach combination, a reach symbol combination other than front / rear out, It is determined which combination is a completely out-of-line design that does not result in reach, and the combination is stored in the corresponding buffer.

  After the update process of the off symbol counter C4, a first specific display unit control process for switching the color displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is executed in step S304. In the first specific display unit control process, jackpot determination, on / off control of a light source switch of an LED disposed in the first specific display unit 51, and the like are performed. In the first specific display unit control process, the symbol display setting by the symbol display device 81 is also set.

  The first specific display unit control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is present. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the first specific display unit 51 is performing switching display. If it is not a big hit and the first specific display unit 51 is not in the switching display, the process proceeds to step S403, and whether or not the number N of active reserved balls of the first specific display unit 51 and the symbol display device 81 is greater than zero. Determine. Then, when the jackpot is being hit or the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0, the present process is terminated as it is.

  If neither the big hit state nor the first specific display unit 51 is being switched, and if the number of pending balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, 1 is subtracted from the number N of active suspension balls. In step S405, a process for shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and the reserved first area → execution area, reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S406, a switching start process for starting switching of the color displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is executed. In this switching start process, the value of the second variation type counter CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 154 is confirmed, and the switching in the first specific display unit 51 is performed based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Determine the display time. The relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the switching display time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  Thereafter, in step S407, a change start command setting process is executed. In the change start command setting process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. If it is determined that the game is a jackpot, the symbol information corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is set as a change start command (change start information). At this time, the values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 154 are confirmed, and the reach type and other rough symbol variation modes are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In addition, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time from the start of variation to the occurrence of reach and the elapsed time until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach are determined, and the information is used as the variation start command. include. Note that the total time of both elapsed times coincides with the switching display time.

  Further, in the change start command setting process, when it is determined that it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. In this case, similarly, it is determined whether the reach is a front / rear out of reach, a reach other than out of front / rear, or a complete out based on the value of the reach random number counter C3. Then, the symbol information corresponding to the value of the out symbol counter C4 stored in the corresponding buffer among the front / rear out of reach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out of symbol, or the complete out symbol symbol buffer is set as a change start command. At this time, the values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 154 are confirmed, and the reach type and other rough symbol variation modes are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In addition, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time from the start of variation to the occurrence of reach and the elapsed time until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach are determined, and the information is used as the variation start command. include.

  The variation start command set in the variation start command setting process is output to the sound emission control device 66 in the next external output process in step S301. The sound emission control device 66 controls driving of the speaker unit and the light emitting unit provided on the front door frame 14 based on the input change start command, and outputs the change start command to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 81 based on the change start command input from the sound emission control device 66. After executing the variation start command setting process, the first specific display unit control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the color display displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S408, and it is determined whether the switching display time has elapsed. As described above, the color switching display time displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is set in advance, and an affirmative determination is made in step S408 when this switching display time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S408 that the switching display time has not elapsed, display color switching processing is executed in step S409. By this display color switching process, the switch of each light source is on / off controlled, and the color displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is switched.

  If it is determined in step S408 that the switching display time has elapsed, a switching end process is executed in step S410. This switching end process is a process for determining in which color the switching of the color displayed on the first specific display unit 51 is finally stopped and turning on the light source of the determined color. After the switching end process is performed, the first specific display unit control process is ended.

  Returning to the description of the normal process in FIG. 20, after the first specific display unit control process, the big hit state control process is executed in step S305. The big hit state control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the jackpot state control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is currently in effect. If it is not a jackpot state, it is determined in step S502 whether or not it is the occurrence timing of a jackpot state. Whether or not it is the occurrence timing of the jackpot state is a game number in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state, It is performed by determining whether or not it is the timing when the switching display on the first specific display unit 51 and the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 81 are finished.

  If it is not the occurrence timing of the jackpot state, the jackpot state control process is terminated as it is. If it is the occurrence timing of the jackpot state, the jackpot state is set in step S503, and the jackpot state control process is terminated after setting the jackpot start command (jackpot start information) in step S504.

  The jackpot state is set by storing a jackpot flag in a jackpot flag storage area provided in the RAM 154 of the main control board 151. In a situation where the jackpot flag is stored, the variable winning device is set in a predetermined manner. Open / close control 35 is executed. The jackpot start command set in step S504 is output to the sound emission control device 66 in the next external output process in step S301. On the basis of the input jackpot start command, the sound emission control device 66 starts drive control corresponding to the jackpot state for the speaker unit and the light emitting unit, and outputs the jackpot start command to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 starts display control of the symbol display device 81 corresponding to the jackpot state based on the jackpot start command input from the sound emission control device 66.

  In the jackpot control process, if a jackpot state has already occurred, an affirmative determination is made in step S501, and the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, a round switching process is executed. Specifically, the variable winning device 35 is opened for each round of the big win state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 35 has elapsed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 35. To do. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the variable winning device 35 is closed.

  After that, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the big hit state end condition is satisfied. The end condition of the big hit state is set such that the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 35 is one round and the round is executed a predetermined number of times. If the end condition is not satisfied, the jackpot state control process is terminated as it is. If the end condition is satisfied, the jackpot state is released in step S507, and the jackpot end command (jackpot end information) is set in step S508, and then the jackpot state control process ends.

  The big hit state is released by deleting the big hit flag from the RAM 154 of the main control board 151, and the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 35 is not performed by deleting the big hit flag. The jackpot end command set in step S508 is output to the sound emission control device 66 in the next external output process in step S301. The sound emission control device 66 ends the drive control corresponding to the jackpot state for the speaker unit and the light emitting unit based on the input jackpot end command, and outputs the jackpot end command to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 ends the display control of the symbol display device 81 corresponding to the jackpot state based on the jackpot end command input from the sound emission control device 66.

  Returning to the description of the normal process in FIG. 20, after the jackpot state control process, the game ball launch control process is executed in step S306. In the game ball launch control process, the game ball launch mechanism 57 is operated once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 78 to 1 A process for firing individual game balls is executed. Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  After step S306, in step S307, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is stored in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 154. The power failure flag is stored when a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring board 155 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 152 of the main control board 151 when the power failure monitoring board 155 confirms that the power supply has been shut down. It is a flag that is deleted when it is set.

  When the power failure flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S308, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S309, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In step S310, both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S307 that the power failure flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power failure processing from step S311 is executed. That is, in step S311, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then, in step S312, a power failure command indicating that the power supply has been shut off is output to another control device such as the payout control device 77. In step S313, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and after the access to the RAM 154 is prohibited in step S314, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed.

  In the normal process, in addition to the above process, for example, a process for controlling the display of the second specific display unit 52, a process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric accessory provided in the operation port 36, and the like are executed.

  Next, various controls executed by the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 based on various commands output from the main control device 65 to the display control device 82 via the sound emission control device 66 will be described.

  First, command input processing that is activated when a command is input from the sound emission control device 66 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command input process is started by interrupting other processes when a command is input from the sound emission control device 66.

  In the command input process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been input. As described above, the change start command is a command that is output when one game is started, that is, when display color switching display on the first specific display unit 51 is started. , Whether or not reach fluctuation display occurs, and when reach fluctuation display occurs, which type of reach fluctuation display is set, multiple types of pattern fluctuation display time Information such as which of the set variable display times is set is included.

  If the change start command is input, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined from the information included in the change start command whether or not a special reach (special reach change display) is generated in the game times.

  Here, the reach variation display is a display of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state by stopping the symbols for a part of the symbol rows displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that can possibly be combined is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. More specifically, as a stage before the end of the symbol display, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot state is established on a preset active line in the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed. In the reach variation display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the symbol variation display is performed on the remaining symbol columns, and a predetermined reach effect display is performed on the background screen. This includes a display of a reach effect on substantially the entire display surface 94 after a combination of symbols is reduced or hidden.

  The special reach means that the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 of the symbol display unit 38 are switched from the initial state (see FIG. 14A) to the reach inclination state (see FIG. 14C), and the multi-view. This is a reach variation display performed in a display state (specifically, a dual view display).

  When the special reach is not generated, the command input process is terminated after the first variation process is executed in step S603. In the first variation processing, from the information included in the variation start command, information on the type of symbol combination to be finally displayed, when performing reach variation display, information on the type of reach variation display, Information on the variable display time and the like are specified, and each specified information is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164 of the display control device 82. In specifying each information, the table information stored in the program ROM 163 of the display control device 82 is referred to, and the information corresponding to the change start command is specified from the table information. In addition, information for specifying that the variable display is being performed is also temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. Note that the information temporarily stored in the work RAM 164 in the first variation process is deleted at the timing when the corresponding game round is completed.

  If special reach is to be generated, the command input process is terminated after the second variation process is executed in step S604. In the second variation processing, each piece of variation display information corresponding to the special reach is identified as the symbol variation display information in the symbol display device 81, and the identified information is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. Specifically, information on the type of symbol combination to be finally displayed, information for specifying that a special reach is generated as a reach variation display such as a special reach flag, and a jackpot state after the end of the variation display Information for specifying whether or not it occurs, information on the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the symbol until the occurrence of the special reach, information on the variable display time from the start of the special reach to the final stop display, etc. The specified information is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164 of the display control device 82.

  When specifying each information, the table information stored in the program ROM 163 is referred to, information for specifying that the variable display is being performed is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164, and temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. It is the same as the first variation process that the information is deleted at the timing when the corresponding game round is completed. In addition, how to measure the variable display time from the start of the symbol variable display to the occurrence of special reach and the variable display time from the start of special reach to the final stop display is arbitrary. A first counter area (first measuring means) and a second counter area (second measuring means) are set in the RAM 164, and the variable display from the start of the variable display of symbols to the final stop display in the first counter area. It is good also as a structure which measures time and measures the variable display time until a special reach is generated from the start of the variable display of a symbol in the 2nd counter area.

  On the other hand, if the change start command is not input, a negative determination is made in step S601, and the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been input. As described above, the jackpot start command is switched to the jackpot state after the display color switching display on the first specific display unit 51 and the symbol change display on the symbol display device 81 in the game times in which the jackpot state occurs. This command is output when

  If the jackpot start command has been input, the command input process is terminated after executing the start process in step S606. In the start processing, the display information for the jackpot state is specified, and the specified information is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164 of the display control device 82. In addition, information for specifying that the jackpot state is started is also temporarily stored in the work RAM 164.

  If the jackpot start command has not been input, it is determined in step S607 whether a jackpot end command has been input. As described above, the jackpot end command is a command that is output when the jackpot state ends.

  If the jackpot end command has been input, the command input processing is ended after executing the end processing in step S608. In the end process, display information for the end of the jackpot state is specified, and the specified information is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164 of the display control device 82. Information for specifying that the jackpot state is to be ended is also temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. Further, the display information for the jackpot state stored in the start process is deleted from the work RAM 164. Further, the display information for the end of the jackpot state stored in the work RAM 164 in the end processing is deleted at the timing when the display is completed.

  If the jackpot end command has not been input, the standby process is executed. In the standby process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time set for standby has elapsed since the end of the previous symbol variation display, and if the predetermined time has elapsed, information on the display for standby is displayed. Is specified, and the specified information is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164 of the display control device 82.

  As described above, the display-related information is stored in the work RAM 164 by executing the command input process. Although detailed description is omitted in the CPU 162 of the display control device 82, the display control process is executed as a part of the display normal process that is repeatedly executed. The display control process is stored in the work RAM 164. An internal command is generated for the VDP 165 based on the stored information, and the generated internal command is output to the VDP 165. The VDP 165 executes processing for displaying a predetermined image on the symbol display device 81 based on the internal command input from the CPU 162.

  Next, multi-view display processing executed as a part of the normal display processing by the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the multi-view display processing, the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 of the symbol display unit 38 are changed from the initial state (see FIG. 14A) to the big hit inclination state (see FIG. 14B) or the reach inclination. Switch to the state (see FIG. 14C), specify whether or not to perform multi-view display (specifically, dual view display) on the symbol display device 81 in the inclined state, and This is a process for executing the corresponding control.

  In the multi-view display process, first, in step S701, it is determined based on the information stored in the work RAM 164 whether or not the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 164 stores information for specifying that the symbol variation display is being performed. In step S702, it is determined based on the information stored in the work RAM 164 whether or not special reach is in progress. Specifically, information for specifying that the special reach is generated is stored in the work RAM 164, and the information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is executed as the special reach. It is determined whether the information corresponds to time.

  Note that information for specifying that the special reach is in progress, such as a special reach flag, is stored in the work RAM 164 at the start of the special reach, and the information is deleted at the end of the special reach. In step S702, the information is deleted. It may be configured to determine whether or not is stored.

  As a result of step S701 and step S702, when the variable display is in progress (YES in step S701) and the special reach is not in progress (NO in step S702), the special reach start process in steps S703 to S706 is executed. Further, when the variable display is being performed (YES in step S701) and the special reach is being performed (YES in step S702), the special reach termination process in steps S707 to S711 is executed. On the other hand, when the variable display is not being performed (NO in step S701), the big hit state processing in steps S712 to S719 is executed.

  Hereinafter, the special reach start process, the special reach end process, and the jackpot state process will be described individually. First, the special reach start process will be described.

  In the special reach start process, first, in step S703, it is determined whether or not the information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is the start timing of the special reach. If it is not the start time of the special reach, the multi-view display process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the time to start the special reach, a multi-view display state is set in step S704. Specifically, information for specifying the multi-view display state, such as a multi-view display flag, is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. By storing the information in the work RAM 164, the internal command output from the CPU 162 to the VDP 165 includes information for performing drawing for multi-view display.

  In a succeeding step S705, an angle grasping process is executed. In the angle grasping process, based on the detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125 provided in the symbol display unit 38, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is any of the initial state, the big hit inclination state, and the reach inclination state. It is specified whether it is in the inclined state. In this case, since it is a special reach start process, the state grasped by the angle grasping process is an initial state.

  Then, after executing the angle change process for special reach in step S706, the multi-view display process is terminated. In the angle change process for special reach, which of the drive signal for tilting operation and the drive signal for return operation is output in order to set the reach tilt state based on the initial state grasped in step S705. In addition to specifying, the output duration of the specified drive signal is specified. These pieces of information are stored in advance in the program ROM 163 in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the current state of the symbol display unit 38 and the switching destination state.

  The drive signal specified in the angle change process for special reach is sent to the angle change motor 117 in the display timer interrupt process that is executed periodically by interrupting the display normal process (for example, a cycle of 2 msec). Is output. Moreover, the output is performed over the output continuation period specified in the angle change process for special reach. Thereby, the state of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 is switched to the reach inclination state. Then, by executing the drawing process for multi-view display in the VDP 165, as already described, the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player is enlarged compared to the initial state. The measurement method of the output continuation period is arbitrary, but for example, a configuration in which measurement is performed by a real-time clock, a counter area provided in the work RAM 164, the number of output of the drive signal, or the like can be considered. This is the same in other angle change processing and angle return processing described later.

  Here, in the special reach angle changing process, until the display is switched from the initial state to the reach inclination state, the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 displays the entire white color or the entire black color. It is preferable that the VDP 165 is controlled so as to perform a display for switching that is not related to the variable display. That is, it is preferable to have a configuration including the same front color display setting means. For example, if the angle of the symbol display device 81 is changed while displaying the non-multi-view display image without performing the same color display, the non-multi-view display is performed on the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84. The image will be displayed in an inverted state. Further, when the angle of the symbol display device 81 is changed while displaying the multi-view display image without performing the same color display, the player can change the upper display image and the lower display image on the display surface 94. The display in which the image is mixed is temporarily recognized. The same problem may occur when switching from a non-multi-view display image to a multi-view display image while changing the angle of the symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the same color display is set, while the angle of the symbol display device 81 is changed, even if the display surface 94 is viewed, only the same color display is visible. Even if the reflecting surface 131 that reflects the image is viewed, only the display of the same color can be viewed, so that the angle of the symbol display device 81 can be changed satisfactorily while making the display visually uncomfortable. The configuration of the same color display setting means is the same in other angle change processing and angle return processing described later.

  Next, the special reach end process will be described.

  In the special reach end process, first, in step S707, it is determined whether or not the information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is the end time of the special reach. If it is not the end time of the special reach, the multi-view display process is ended as it is.

  If it is the end time of the special reach, it is determined in step S708 whether or not information for specifying that the jackpot state occurs after the end of the variable display is stored in the work RAM 164. When the big hit state occurs, the multi-view display process is terminated as it is.

  If the big hit state does not occur, the multi-view display state is canceled in step S709. Specifically, the information for specifying that the multi-view display state is stored in the work RAM 164 is deleted. When the information is deleted, the internal command output from the CPU 162 to the VDP 165 does not include information for performing drawing for multi-view display. Thereby, in the drawing process in the VDP 165, a process corresponding to the drawing for normal display is executed.

  In subsequent step S710, an angle grasping process is executed in the same manner as in step S705. In this case, since it is a special reach completion process, the state of the symbol display unit 38 grasped by the angle grasping process is a reach inclination state.

  Thereafter, the angle return process is executed in step S711, and then the multi-view display process ends. In the angle return process, in order to return to the initial state based on the reach inclination state grasped in step S710, it is specified which of the drive signal for the inclination operation and the drive signal for the return operation is output. Then, the output duration of the specified drive signal is specified.

  The drive signal specified in the angle return process is output to the angle change motor 117 in a display timer interruption process executed by interrupting the normal display process periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). Moreover, the output is performed over the output continuation period specified by the angle return process of step S711. Thereby, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is returned to the initial state.

  Here, in the big hit state, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is switched to the big hit inclination state. In this case, when the big hit state occurs after the special reach by executing the process of step S708, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is not returned to the initial state but is maintained in the reach inclination state. The For example, when a big hit state occurs after the special reach, it is assumed that the big hit inclination state is restored after returning from the reach inclined state to the initial state, but in this case, the initial state of the symbol display unit 38 is assumed. This means that the return operation to is performed wastefully. On the other hand, this configuration makes it possible to omit the useless return operation.

  Next, the big hit state processing will be described.

  In the big hit state processing, first, in step S712, it is determined whether or not information for specifying that the big hit state is to be started is stored in the work RAM 164. If information for specifying that the big hit state is to be started is stored in the work RAM 164, the multi-view display state is set in step S713. The contents of this process are the same as in step S704. At this time, information for specifying that the jackpot state is started is deleted from the work RAM 164.

  In subsequent step S714, an angle grasping process is executed in the same manner as in step S705. In this case, since the process is for starting the big hit state, the state of the symbol display unit 38 grasped by the angle grasping process is the initial state or the reach inclination state. In other words, the transition to the jackpot state includes the transition to the jackpot state without special reach, and the transition to the jackpot state after the special reach is performed. In the latter case, it is a reach inclination state.

  Thereafter, after the angle change process for the big hit state is executed in step S715, the multi-view display process is terminated. In the angle changing process, when the state grasped in step S714 is the initial state, the driving signal for the tilting operation and the driving signal for the return operation are used to set the jackpot tilting state based on the initial state. The output duration period of the specified drive signal is specified. In addition, when the state grasped in step S714 is the reach inclination state, the drive signal for the inclination operation and the drive signal for the return operation are set in order to obtain the big hit inclination state based on the reach inclination state. The output duration period of the specified drive signal is specified.

  The drive signal specified in the angle change process for the big hit state is sent to the angle change motor 117 in the display timer interrupt process that is executed periodically by interrupting the normal display process (for example, 2 msec cycle). Is output. Moreover, the output is performed over the output continuation period specified by the angle change process of step S715. Thereby, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is switched to the big hit inclination state.

  On the other hand, when the information for specifying the start of the jackpot state is not stored in the work RAM 164, the information for specifying the end of the jackpot state is stored in the work RAM 164 in step S716. It is determined whether or not. If information for specifying that the jackpot state is to be ended is not stored in the work RAM 164, the multi-view display process is ended as it is.

  If information for specifying that the jackpot state is to be ended is stored in the work RAM 164, the multi-view display state is canceled in step S717. The contents of this process are the same as in step S709. At this time, the information for specifying the end of the jackpot state is deleted from the work RAM 164.

  In the subsequent step S718, an angle grasping process is executed in the same manner as in step S705. In this case, since the process is to end the jackpot state, the state of the symbol display unit 38 grasped by the angle grasping process is a jackpot inclination state.

  Thereafter, the angle return process is executed in step S719, and then the multi-view display process ends. In the angle return process, in order to return to the initial state based on the big hit inclination state grasped in step S718, it is specified which of the drive signal for the inclination operation and the drive signal for the return operation is output. Then, the output duration of the specified drive signal is specified.

  The drive signal specified in the angle return process is output to the angle change motor 117 in a display timer interruption process executed by interrupting the normal display process periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). Moreover, the output is performed over the output continuation period specified by the angle return process of step S719. Thereby, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is returned to the initial state.

  Next, drawing processing executed by the VDP 165 of the display control device 82 will be described.

  Here, prior to the description of the drawing process, a configuration for displaying an image on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the video RAM 167 of the display control device 82, and FIG. 25B is a diagram for explaining how the liquid crystal display unit 90 is driven by the image processing device 168 of the symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing for.

  As described above, the VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the CPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 167 from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing. The display device 81 has a function of displaying. In this case, the symbol display device 81 enables multi-view display, specifically dual view display, and the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 has an upper non-adjustment area 95 that does not perform dual view display and A lower non-adjustment region 96 and a viewing angle adjustment region 97 that enables dual view display are set, and the viewing angle adjustment region 97 is the same as the upper display region 102 in the liquid crystal display unit 90 of the symbol display device 81. A lower display area 103 is set.

  A drawing area corresponding to each of the areas 95, 96, 102, and 103 is set in the video RAM 167 in which display data is drawn by the VDP 165, and the display data is drawn in each drawing area. An image corresponding to each display data drawn in the areas 95, 96, 102, and 103 is displayed.

  That is, the video RAM 167 is partitioned into a plurality of areas 171 to 174 in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. An upper drawing area 172 for adjustment corresponding to the upper display area 102 of the viewing angle adjustment area 97, a lower drawing area 173 for adjustment corresponding to the lower display area 103 of the viewing angle adjustment area 97, and lower non-adjustment The non-adjustment lower drawing area 174 corresponding to the area 96 is set. The VDP 165 outputs the display data drawn in each area 171 to 174 of the video RAM 167 to the image processing device 168 of the symbol display device 81 at a predetermined output timing.

  The image processing device 168 drives the liquid crystal display unit 90 based on display data drawn in the drawing areas 171 to 174 of the video RAM 167. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25B, for the upper non-adjustment area 95 and the lower non-adjustment area 96, the image processing device 168 uses the non-adjustment upper drawing area 171 and the non-adjustment lower drawing in the video RAM 167. The display data drawn in the area 174 is displayed as it is.

  On the other hand, as described above, the upper display region 102 and the lower display region 103 in the viewing angle adjustment region 97 are the upper display region in the vertical direction in the region of the liquid crystal display unit 90 corresponding to the viewing angle adjustment region 97. 102 and the lower display area 103 are alternately arranged in units of one pixel. In response to this, the image processing device 168 displays the display data drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167 alternately in the upper display area 102 and the lower display. The display data is divided so as to correspond to the area 103, and the divided display data is displayed in the corresponding upper display area 102 and lower display area 103, respectively.

  As described above, in the video RAM 167, the upper drawing area for adjustment 172 and the lower drawing area for adjustment 173 are provided separately on the upper and lower sides. On the other hand, in the liquid crystal display unit 90, the upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103 are set to be alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction. Accordingly, each display data drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167 is in a state of being contracted in the vertical direction as compared with the state of the image actually viewed by the player. Yes.

  Based on the above configuration, the drawing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the drawing process is repeatedly started in the VDP 165 periodically (for example, 2 msec).

  In the drawing process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether it is a drawing timing based on an internal command input from the CPU 162 of the display control device 82. If it is not the drawing timing, the drawing process is terminated as it is. If it is the drawing timing, in step S802, it is determined based on an internal command input from the CPU 162 whether or not it is in a multi-view display state.

  If it is not in the multi-view display state, the drawing process for normal display is executed in step S803, and then the drawing process is terminated. On the other hand, if the display state is the multi-view display state, the drawing process for multi-view display is executed in step S804, and then the drawing process ends. Hereinafter, drawing processing for normal display and drawing processing for multi-view display will be described individually.

  First, the drawing process for normal display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the manner of drawing display data on the video RAM 167 and the manner of displaying a substantial display area in the symbol display unit 38 will be described as appropriate using FIG. To do. FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of drawing display data on the video RAM 167, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of display in the display area of the symbol display unit 38. .

  In the normal display drawing process, first, in step S901, the drawing process to the non-adjustment upper drawing area 171 of the video RAM 167 is executed. As a result, display data corresponding to the internal command from the CPU 162 is drawn in the non-adjustment upper drawing area 171 of the video RAM 167 as shown in FIG.

  In a succeeding step S902, a unified drawing process to the adjustment upper drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167 is executed. In the unified drawing process, the same display data is drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28A, the same display data corresponding to the internal command from the CPU 162 is drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167.

  In a succeeding step S903, a drawing process to the non-adjustment lower drawing area 174 of the video RAM 167 is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28A, display data corresponding to the internal command from the CPU 162 is drawn in the non-adjustment lower drawing area 174 of the video RAM 167.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and after executing the output process of outputting the display data drawn in the video RAM 167 in steps S901 to S903 to the image processing device 168, the normal display drawing process is terminated.

  By performing steps S901 to S903 in the drawing processing for normal display, display data is drawn in the areas 171 to 174 of the video RAM 167 as shown in FIG. Then, the display data is output to the image processing device 168 in step S904, so that an image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. The

  Here, in the normal display in which multi-view display is not performed, the state of the symbol display unit 38 is an initial state, and the player basically visually recognizes the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 from the front. Then, in the configuration in which the parallax barrier panel 93 of the symbol display device 81 is provided as shown in FIG. 10B, the player is displayed in the upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90. Both images will be viewed at the same time. On the other hand, as described above, in the liquid crystal display unit 90, the upper display region 102 and the lower display region 103 are set to be alternately arranged in the vertical direction in units of one pixel. In this case, the same display data is drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 as described above, so that the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is as shown in FIG. In addition, the same display data is displayed in a state of being spread over the entire viewing angle adjustment region 97.

  In the symbol display device 81 capable of performing multi-view display in this way, in normal display without multi-view display, the same display data is drawn in the upper drawing area 172 for adjustment and the lower drawing area 173 for adjustment. The upper display data and the lower display data in the normal display can be made common. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of display data to be stored in the character ROM 166 as compared with a configuration in which display data for upper display and display data for lower display are stored separately. Become.

  Next, the drawing process for multi-view display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding, the state of drawing display data on the video RAM 167 and the state of display of a substantial display area in the symbol display unit 38 will be described as appropriate using FIG. To do. FIGS. 30A and 30B are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the display data is drawn in the video RAM 167, and FIG. 30C is a diagram for explaining the display in the display area of the symbol display unit 38. FIG. It is explanatory drawing.

  Here, as already described, as the state of the symbol display unit 38 in which multi-view display is performed, the big hit inclination state (see FIG. 14B) and the reach inclination state (see FIG. 14C). In the drawing process for multi-view display, the drawing process corresponding to each tilt state is executed.

  In the drawing process for multi-view display, first, in step S1001, a drawing process in the non-adjustment upper drawing area 171 of the video RAM 167 is executed. However, as already described, in the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state of the symbol display unit 38 in which multi-view display is to be performed, the upper non-adjustment area 95 on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is placed in front. The reflection unit 84 is arranged, and the upper non-adjustment area 95 cannot be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the drawing process, the display data is not drawn, but is set so that black display is performed in the entire upper non-adjustment region 95 (in order to prevent the backlight light from being emitted forward). Setting). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 30A, display data is not drawn in the non-adjustment upper drawing area 171.

  In a succeeding step S1002, a drawing process to the adjustment upper drawing area 172 of the video RAM 167 is executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 30A, display data corresponding to the internal command from the CPU 162 is drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 of the video RAM 167. The image corresponding to the display data is visually recognized by the player after being reflected by the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 in the multi-view display.

  In a succeeding step S1003, a drawing process to the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167 is executed. As a result, display data corresponding to the internal command from the CPU 162 is drawn in the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167 as shown in FIG. The image corresponding to the display data is directly recognized by the player from the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 in the multi-view display.

  In this case, in the drawing process in the upper drawing area for adjustment 172 (step S1002) and the drawing process in the lower drawing area for adjustment 173 (step S1003), for example, both drawing areas such as display data of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner are used. Some display data set to 172 and 173 is common in the character ROM 166. By sharing the display data in this way, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of information for displaying an image on the display surface 94.

  In a succeeding step S1004, a drawing process to the non-adjustment lower drawing area 174 of the video RAM 167 is executed. As a result, display data corresponding to the internal command from the CPU 162 is drawn in the non-adjustment lower drawing area 174 of the video RAM 167 as shown in FIG.

  In subsequent step S1005, the upside down process is executed. In the upside down process, as shown in FIG. 30B, the display data drawn in the upper drawing area 172 for adjustment among the drawing areas 171 to 174 of the video RAM 167 is turned upside down.

  As described above, the image corresponding to the display data in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 is visually recognized by the player after being reflected by the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 in multi-view display. In the configuration performed above the display surface 94, the image displayed on the reflection surface 131 is a vertically inverted image displayed on the display surface 94. On the other hand, the image displayed on the reflection surface 131 is originally an image that should be visually recognized by the player by executing the upside down process and inverting the display data of the upper drawing area 172 for adjustment upside down. Note that the display data to be subjected to the upside down process includes, for example, display data of symbols to be displayed in a variable manner.

  After that, the process proceeds to step S1006, and after performing the output process of collectively outputting the display data drawn in the video RAM 167 in steps S1001 to S1005 to the image processing device 168, the drawing process for multi-view display ends.

  By executing steps S1001 to S1005 in the drawing process for multi-view display, display data is drawn in the drawing areas 171 to 174 of the video RAM 167 as shown in FIG. The display data is output to the image processing device 168 in step S1006, thereby including the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 as shown in FIG. An image corresponding to the display data is displayed in the display area.

  Here, in the reach inclination state of the symbol display unit 38, as described above, the area projected on the reflection surface 131 coincides with substantially the entire viewing angle adjustment area 97 of the display surface 94. Then, as shown in FIG. 30C, the display data drawn in the adjustment upper drawing area 172 of the video RAM 167 is an upside down image that is spread over the entire reflecting surface 131. Visible to the player. Further, in the viewing angle adjustment region 97 on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 30C, the display data drawn in the adjustment lower drawing area 173 of the video RAM 167 is expanded as a whole. It is visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, display data is set for each of the drawing areas 171 to 174 in the drawing process for multi-view display, so that a predetermined background image or the like is displayed in the display area including the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131. The same pattern is displayed across the boundary between the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131, and a predetermined pattern or the like moves from one surface to the other across the boundary between the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131. Is displayed.

  Next, the display contents in the display area of the symbol display unit 38 including the display surface 94 and the reflecting surface 131 will be described by taking as an example a case where symbol variation display is performed. FIG. 31A is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents in a situation where special reach is not performed, and FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents in a situation where special reach is being performed. is there.

  In a situation where special reach is not performed in the variable display of symbols, as shown in FIG. 31A, the symbol display unit 38 is in an initial state, and the display surface 94 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33. It has become. In this case, multi-view display is not performed, and symbol variation display is performed using a partial region in one lane of the bowling alley as a background image.

  In a situation where special reach is performed in the variable display of symbols, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the symbol display unit 38 is in a reach inclination state, and the display surface 94 has its lower end as an axis to play the game board 33. The reflective surface 131 is in a state of being orthogonal to the display surface 94 at the upper end portion of the display surface 94. In this case, multi-view display is performed, and when viewed from the player, the image reflected by the reflecting surface 131 is displayed at a position where the display surface 94 is extended upward on the same plane. Visible to. In this state, reach variation display is performed using an image including the entire lane of one bowling alley as a background image. As a result, the display area for performing the reach variation display is enlarged, and the reach variation display can be increased as the reach variation display is dynamically performed.

  Here, the combination of reach symbols is displayed in the lower non-adjustment area 96 of the display surface 94. The lower non-adjustment region 96 is a region in which multi-view display is not performed, and the viewing angle is not adjusted by the parallax barrier panel 93, so that the resolution and brightness are higher than the viewing angle adjustment region 97. Then, by displaying the combination of reach symbols in the lower non-adjustment area 96 with high resolution and brightness in this way, the player can clearly recognize the combination of reach symbols.

  Incidentally, in the reach inclination state, the lower non-adjustment area 96 is an area located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the display surface 94. In addition, the display area composed of the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is visually recognized by the player so that the display surface 94 is tilted in the front-rear direction so that the display surface 94 is on the front side. Is also an area located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 in the display area. That is, the lower non-adjustment region 96 is a relatively conspicuous region, and the lower non-adjustment region 96 is a region where multi-view display is not performed, so that the resolution and brightness of the image at a relatively conspicuous position are relatively Can be increased.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The symbol display device 81 in which the viewing angle adjustment region 97 capable of performing dual view display is set on the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 capable of reflecting the image displayed in the viewing angle adjustment region 97. The variable display unit 38 is provided with a reflection unit 84, and the display surface 94 is directed toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 when the variable display unit 38 is in an inclined state such as a big hit inclination state or a reach inclination state. The symbol display device 81 is disposed so as to be inclined upward, and the reflection unit 84 is disposed above the display surface 94 so that the reflective surface 131 is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, The image displayed toward the lower side of the viewing angle adjustment area 97 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 and the viewing angle adjustment area 97 Image displayed toward the side was set to be visible from the pachinko machine 10 forward by projected on the reflecting surface 131. That is, in the tilted state, the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are configured as display areas, and different images can be displayed on the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131, respectively. As a result, the display area can be enlarged as compared with a configuration in which an image is displayed only on the display surface 94.

  In particular, in the tilted state, as described above, the symbol display device 81 is arranged so that the display surface 94 is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflective surface 131 is located above the display surface 94. 10 Since the reflection unit 84 is disposed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear, it is possible to secure a large display area as compared with the opening 33a of the game board 33, and as a result, the opening 33a A relatively large display area can be secured without increasing the size. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the size in the front-rear direction of the symbol display unit 38 in a state where a large display area is secured as compared with the opening 33a.

  For example, a configuration in which the opening 33a is enlarged to secure a relatively large display area is envisaged, but in this case, it is necessary to reduce an area in which the game ball can flow down in the game area. If it does so, the flow-down mode of the game ball in the game area becomes monotonous, which is not preferable. In addition, although a configuration in which the size of the game board 33 is extended in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction is also assumed, a plurality of electric devices are installed around the game board 33, and the size of the game board 33 is changed in the vertical direction or the horizontal Expansion in the direction is not preferable because the installation area of the electric devices is reduced. In addition, the size of the pachinko machine 10 is expanded in the vertical direction or the left-right direction, and a large game board is installed in accordance therewith, and a configuration in which a symbol display device having a large display surface is arranged is also assumed. Since 10 is installed in an existing island facility in a game hall or the like, it is not preferable to expand the size of the pachinko machine 10 in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

  Furthermore, it is also assumed that the display area is enlarged by arranging the symbol display device having a larger display surface than the opening 33a at the rear of the pachinko machine 10, but in this case, the pachinko machine 10 There is a concern that the dimension in the front-rear direction becomes extremely large. In the game hall, the pachinko machine 10 is arranged with the back surface facing the island facility. Therefore, if the longitudinal dimension of the pachinko machine 10 becomes extremely large, the pachinko machine 10 faces the island facility. There is a concern that the placement cannot be performed well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the symbol display device 81 is arranged so that the display surface 94 is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflective surface 131 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 above the display surface 94. By disposing the reflection unit 84 so as to be inclined downward toward the screen, it is possible to satisfactorily realize an increase in the display area without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  Moreover, since the reflective surface 131 and the display surface 94 are arranged side by side rather than side by side, the influence of the parallax of the left and right eyes on the multi-view display is reduced for the player. That is, the left eye and the right eye have different gaze angles in the horizontal direction when a predetermined part of the display surface 94 is visually recognized. Assuming a configuration in which multi-view display is performed in the horizontal direction on the display surface 94, depending on the position of the player's viewpoint with respect to the display surface 94, the viewing angle is directed to the left side due to the difference in the line of sight between the left eye and the right eye It is assumed that the set image is visually recognized with the left eye and the image with the viewing angle set to the right side is visually recognized with the right eye. On the other hand, the left eye and the right eye generally have a small angle difference in the vertical line of sight when a predetermined part of the display surface 94 is viewed. Therefore, by performing multi-view display in the vertical direction on the display surface 94 as in this pachinko machine 10, the occurrence of inconveniences such as viewing different displays of the multi-view display with the left eye and the right eye is suppressed, For the player, the influence of the parallax between the left and right eyes on the multi-view display is reduced.

  In the tilted state, the reflection surface 131 is arranged above the display surface 94. In a game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, in-store lighting is provided on the ceiling. In this case, by disposing the reflection surface 131 above the display surface 94 as described above, it is difficult for the light from the in-store lighting to be reflected on the reflection surface 131 that easily reflects light.

  In the tilted state, the angle of the reflecting surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the image reflected by the reflecting surface 131 is displayed on the same plane. It is visually recognized as being displayed at the extended position. Thereby, compared with the structure visually recognized so that the said display area may bend in the halfway position of an up-down direction, the image of the said display area enlarged can be visually recognized without a sense of incongruity.

  Further, in the tilted state, when the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are visually recognized through the opening 33a, the symbol display device 81 and the reflection display device are positioned at positions where no gap appears between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131. Since the unit 84 is arranged, the display area is continuous. Also from this point, the enlarged image of the display region can be visually recognized.

  As a state of the variable display unit 38 in which the positions of the display surface 94 and the reflective surface 131 are predetermined, the display surface 94 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33 in addition to the tilted state. The initial state was set so that no reflection was performed. Then, the state of the variable display unit 38 is set to the initial state when the special reach or the big hit state is not set, and the state of the variable display unit 38 is changed to the tilted state when the special reach or the big hit state. This makes it possible to change not only the contents of the displayed image but also the size of the display area in the special reach and jackpot states, compared to other states. It becomes possible to increase the degree.

  As the above-mentioned inclination state, a big hitting inclination state and a reach inclination state are set, and in the special reach, the reach inclination state is set, and in the big hit state, the big hit inclination state is set, so that a display area corresponding to the game situation is set. The size change pattern is diversified.

  In this case, the angle of the reflecting surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle in both the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state, and further, the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 through the opening 33a. The symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 are arranged at a position where it appears that no gap is generated between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131. Thus, in each inclined state, the state of being viewed as if the image reflected by the reflecting surface 131 is displayed at a position where the display surface 94 is extended upward on the same plane is maintained, and The state where the display area is continuous is maintained. Therefore, in the configuration in which the tilt state is changed according to the game situation, the image in the display area can be visually recognized in any tilt state.

  Further, in the big hit inclination state and the reach inclination state, the upside down process is performed in the drawing process for multi-view display (FIG. 29) in the VDP 165 of the display control device 82, so that the upper side for adjustment is adjusted. The display data set in each of the drawing area 172 and the adjustment lower drawing area 173 is not completely different from each other. The image projected in this way can be oriented to be shown to the player. That is, by performing the upside down process, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize the image displayed on the reflection surface 131 during the multi-view display while reducing the necessary storage capacity in the character ROM 166 or the like. it can.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit is different from that in the first embodiment. This different configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. 32A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 181 in the initial state, FIG. 32B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 181 in the big hitting inclined state, and FIG. (C) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit 181 in the inclination state for reach. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the symbol display unit 181 includes a symbol display device 182 and a reflection unit 183 as in the first embodiment, and the symbol display device 182 and The reflection units 183 are arranged side by side so that the reflection unit 183 is on the upper side. As in the first embodiment, as the state of the symbol display unit 181, the initial state shown in FIG. 32 (a), the big hit inclination state shown in FIG. 32 (b), and FIG. 32 (c). The reach inclination state shown in FIG. 32A to 32C, reference numeral 184 indicates a part of an angle changing mechanism having a function of holding the symbol display unit 181 in each state, and reference numeral 185 indicates a follow-up mechanism of the reflecting unit 183.

  In the symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, the multi-view display is performed on a part of the display surface 94. However, in the symbol display device 182 in the present embodiment, the multi-view is displayed on the entire display surface 186. Display. Specifically, dual view display is performed as the multi-view display, and the dual view display is performed in the vertical direction as in the first embodiment.

  The vertical dimension of the reflecting surface 187 of the reflecting unit 183 is set to be larger than that of the reflecting unit 84 in the first embodiment so as to correspond to the configuration in which the entire display surface 186 is displayed in the symbol display device 182. The vertical dimensions of the display surface 186 and the reflection surface 187 are the same or substantially the same. In this configuration, assuming that the player visually recognizes the opening 33a formed in the game board 33 from the front, the inclination angle of the display surface 186 with respect to the game board 33 is 45 degrees as shown in FIG. In the tilted state, the entire image directed upward in the dual view display on the display surface 186 is displayed on the entire reflecting surface 187.

  In this case, since the angle of the reflection surface 187 with respect to the display surface 186 is a right angle or a substantially right angle, the reflection surface 187 reflects the reflection surface 187 when viewed from the player as already described in the first embodiment. The displayed image is viewed as if the display surface 186 is displayed at a position extended upward on the same plane. The substantial display area visually recognized by the player is when viewing the display surface in a state in which the symbol display device 182 whose vertical dimension of the display surface 186 is doubled with respect to the game board 33 is inclined 45 degrees backward. Matches. As a result, the display area can be made larger than in the first embodiment.

  Furthermore, since only the image directed upward in the dual view display on the display surface 186 is displayed on the reflective surface 187, it is possible to suppress the display of an object other than the image directed upward. The player can be made to visually recognize the display.

  However, in the configuration in which the dimension of the reflection surface 187 is set in correspondence with the reach inclination state in which the display surface 186 is inclined 45 degrees backward as described above, as shown in FIG. In the big hit inclination state in which the display surface 186 is inclined backward by 35 degrees, only a part of the image directed upward in the dual view display of the display surface 186 is displayed on the entire reflection surface 187. Accordingly, in correspondence with this, the image is set to the upper side in the dual view display on the display surface 186 in the reach inclination state. Incidentally, according to the present configuration, it is possible to prevent other than the display surface 186 from appearing on the reflection surface 187 in the big hitting inclined state.

  In this configuration, the vertical dimension of the opening 33a is displayed so that the entire display surface 186 and the reflecting surface 187 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a of the game board 33 in the reach inclination state. It is set larger than the vertical dimension of the surface 186. Then, in the initial state of the symbol display unit 181 shown in FIG. 32A, when the opening 33a is viewed from the front, a gap is generated between the upper edge of the opening 33a and the upper edge of the display surface 186. There is a concern that the lower end side of the reflecting surface 187 and the back side of the game board 33 in the initial state are visually recognized through the gap.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 33, a shutter member 188 that protrudes and protrudes from the upper edge of the opening 33a with respect to the opening 33a is provided. The shutter member 188 is driven by a predetermined shutter driving unit to close the gap between the upper edge of the opening 33a and the upper edge of the display surface 186, and upward from the opening 33a. It is provided to be movable to the retracted position.

  In the initial state of the symbol display unit 181, the gap is closed by moving the shutter member 188 to the closing position. On the other hand, when the symbol display unit 181 is in the big hit inclination state or the reach inclination state, the shutter member 188 is moved to the retracted position, so that a part of the opening 33a is not closed, and the opening 33a as described above. Through this, the entire display surface 186 and the reflection surface 187 are visible.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit is different from that in the first embodiment. This different configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 191 in the initial state, FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 191 in the big hitting inclination state, and FIG. (C) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the symbol display unit 191 in the inclination state for reach. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the symbol display unit 191 includes a symbol display device 192 and a reflection unit 193, as in the first embodiment, and the symbol display device 192 and The reflection units 193 are arranged side by side so that the reflection unit 193 is on the upper side. As in the first embodiment, as the state of the symbol display unit 191, the initial state shown in FIG. 33 (a), the big hit inclination state shown in FIG. 33 (b), and the state shown in FIG. 33 (c). The reach inclination state shown in FIG. 33A to 33C, reference numeral 194 indicates a part of an angle changing mechanism having a function of holding the symbol display unit 191 in each state, and reference numeral 195 indicates a follow-up mechanism of the reflecting unit 193.

  In the symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, the multi-view display is performed on a part of the display surface 94. However, in the symbol display device 192 in the present embodiment, the entire display surface 196 is multi-view display. I do. Specifically, dual view display is performed as the multi-view display, and the dual view display is performed in the vertical direction as in the first embodiment.

  Corresponding to the configuration in which the entire display surface 196 is displayed in the symbol display device 192, the vertical dimension of the reflection surface 197 of the reflection unit 193 is set larger than that of the reflection unit 84 in the first embodiment. Has been. Specifically, when the player visually recognizes the opening 33a formed in the game board 33 from the front in the big hit inclination state of FIG. 33B, an image directed upward in the dual view display of the display surface 196. Is set to be reflected on the entire reflecting surface 197.

  In this case, since the angle of the reflection surface 197 with respect to the display surface 196 is a right angle or a substantially right angle, the reflection surface 197 reflects the reflection surface 197 when viewed from the player as already described in the first embodiment. The displayed image is viewed as if the display surface 196 is displayed at a position extended upward on the same plane. And the substantial display area which a player visually recognizes is a case where the display surface of the state which inclined the symbol display apparatus 192 whose vertical dimension of the display surface 196 is 35 degree | times back with respect to the game board 33 is visually recognized. Matches. As a result, the display area can be made larger than in the first embodiment.

  Furthermore, since only the image directed upward in the dual view display on the display surface 196 is displayed on the reflective surface 197, it is possible to suppress the display of an image other than the image directed upward. The player can be made to visually recognize the display.

  However, in the configuration in which the dimensions of the reflection surface 197 are set in correspondence with the large hitting inclination state in which the display surface 196 is inclined 35 degrees backward as described above, as shown in FIG. In the reach tilt state in which the display surface 196 tilts backward by 45 degrees, an area other than the image directed upward in the dual view display on the display surface 196 is displayed. That is, the area on the near side of the display surface 196 is displayed.

  In this case, the arrangement positions of the symbol display device 192 and the reflection unit 193 are arranged so that a game ball flowing down the game area on the reflection surface 197 and a game ball rolling on the stage unit 43 of the center frame 41 are not projected. Is set. That is, the rotation axis of the symbol display device 192 is arranged at a position separated from the game board 33 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a shielding plate 198 is provided below the opening 33a on the back surface of the game board 33, and the shielding plate 198 is projected in a region on the reflection surface 197 that projects images other than the above-described image. This prevents a control device or the like mounted on the back surface of the game board 33 from being displayed on the reflection surface 197.

  In this configuration, the vertical dimension of the opening 33a is set to the display surface 196 in order to make the entire display surface 196 and the reflecting surface 197 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a of the game board 33 in the big hitting inclination state. It is set larger than the vertical dimension. Then, in the initial state of the symbol display unit 191 shown in FIG. 33A, when the opening 33a is viewed from the front, a gap is generated between the upper edge of the opening 33a and the upper edge of the display surface 196. There is a concern that the lower end side of the reflecting surface 197 and the back side of the game board 33 in the initial state are visually recognized through the gap.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 33, a shutter member 199 that protrudes and protrudes from the upper edge of the opening 33a with respect to the opening 33a is provided. The shutter member 199 is driven by a predetermined shutter driving unit to close a gap between the upper edge of the opening 33a and the upper edge of the display surface 196, and upward from the opening 33a. It is provided to be movable to the retracted position.

  In the initial state of the symbol display unit 191, the gap is closed by moving the shutter member 199 to the closing position. On the other hand, when the symbol display unit 191 is in the big hit inclination state or the reach inclination state, the shutter member 199 moves to the retracted position so that a part of the opening portion 33a is not blocked, and the opening portion 33a as described above. Through this, the entire display surface 196 and the reflection surface 197 are visible.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit 201 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this different configuration will be described. 34A to 34C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 201 in the present embodiment. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the symbol display unit 201 includes a symbol display device 81 and a reflection unit 84, as in the first embodiment, and the symbol display device 81 and The reflection units 84 are arranged side by side vertically so that the reflection unit 84 is on the upper side. In addition, an angle changing mechanism that changes the angle of the symbol display device 81 is provided, and a tracking mechanism that moves the reflection unit 84 to follow the change in the angle of the symbol display device 81 is provided. 34A to 34C, reference numeral 202 denotes a part of an angle changing mechanism having a function of holding the symbol display unit 201 in each state, and reference numeral 203 denotes a follow-up mechanism of the reflection unit 193. .

  However, as the state of the symbol display unit 201, the initial state in the first embodiment, that is, the state in which the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33 and multi-view display is not performed. Is not set. As a state of the symbol display unit 201, the display surface 94 is inclined toward the back of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 33 and the angle of the reflection surface 131 with respect to the display surface 94 is a right angle or a substantially right angle. A plurality of types are set with different inclination angles of the display surface 94.

  The plurality of states include a first setting inclination state shown in FIG. 34 (a), a second setting inclination state shown in FIG. 34 (b), and a third setting inclination shown in FIG. 34 (c). The state is set. The first setting inclination state is a state in which the angle of the display surface 94 with respect to the game board 33 is 35 degrees, which is the first setting angle, in the same manner as the big hit inclination state in the first embodiment. The second setting inclination state is a state in which the angle of the display surface 94 with respect to the game board 33 is 45 degrees, which is the second setting angle, in the same manner as the reach inclination state in the first embodiment. The third setting inclination state is a state in which the angle of the display surface 94 with respect to the game board 33 is 55 degrees which is the third setting angle.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state of the symbol display unit 201 is not changed according to the symbol variable display state or the game state on the display surface 94, but the first setting inclination state to the third setting state. The state set by the player in the inclined state is maintained regardless of the state of the variable display of the symbols and the game state. In the display area of the symbol display unit 201 including the display surface 94 and the reflecting surface 131, multi-view display (specifically, dual view display) is performed regardless of the symbol variable display state and the gaming state. .

  The position of the eye height relative to the opening 33a formed in the game board 33 differs depending on the player, and a player who looks up the opening 33a slightly and a player who looks at the opening 33a from the front. It is assumed that the player will look down the opening 33a slightly. If it does so, the angle of the display surface 94 which can visually recognize a multiview display favorably changes with players. For example, when the symbol display device 81 is formed so that the multi-view display can be best viewed when both the incident angle of the line of sight with respect to the display surface 94 and the incident angle of the line of sight with respect to the reflecting surface 131 are 45 degrees. For the player who looks up the opening 33a slightly, the first setting inclination state of FIG. 34 (a) is preferable, and for the player who looks at the opening 33a from the front, FIG. 34 (b). The second setting inclination state is preferable, and the third setting inclination state of FIG. 34 (c) is preferable for a player who looks down the opening 33a slightly. In view of the circumstances, in this embodiment, the player can set the state of the symbol display unit 201.

  Therefore, an electrical configuration for the player to set the state of the symbol display unit 201 will be described below. FIG. 35 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration relating to the setting of the state of the symbol display unit 201.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the display control device 82 includes a CPU 162, a program ROM 163, a work RAM 164, a video display processor (VDP) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167 individually as in the first embodiment. A display control board 161 mounted in an integrated manner is provided. Similar to the first embodiment, the display control device 82 is electrically connected to the symbol display device 81, the angle detection sensors 123 to 125, and the angle change motor 117 provided in the symbol display unit 201. The display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 81 and changes the state of the symbol display unit 201 by driving the angle change motor 117 based on the detection result input from the angle detection sensors 123 to 125. Let Note that the angle detection sensors 123 to 125 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each setting inclination state.

  In this case, unlike the first embodiment, an angle setting operation device 204 is electrically connected to the display control device 82. The angle setting operation device 204 is provided on the front door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 so that it can be manually operated from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The angle setting operation device 204 is provided with an adjustment mode switching button 205 and an angle change button 206. When the adjustment mode switching button 205 is operated under a predetermined situation, the state of the symbol display unit 201 is changed. The CPU 162 of the display control device 82 starts control processing that enables the setting of the display control device 82, and the state of the symbol display unit 201 is changed by operating the angle change button 206 during the control processing.

  Next, the angle adjustment processing executed by the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The angle adjustment process is executed as a part of the normal display process.

  In the angle adjustment process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the adjustment mode (adjustment state) is being performed. The adjustment mode is a state of the CPU 162 that can set which one of the first setting inclination state, the second setting inclination state, and the third setting inclination state the state of the symbol display unit 201 is set to. The operation is started when the adjustment mode switching button 205 is operated, and is ended when the adjustment mode switching button 205 is operated again or when the variation display of the symbol is started.

  Whether or not the adjustment mode is set is determined by determining whether or not information for specifying the adjustment mode is stored in the work RAM 164, such as an adjustment mode flag. The information is stored in the work RAM 164 when the adjustment mode switching button 205 is operated to start the adjustment mode, and the adjustment mode switching button 205 is operated again or a change start command is input to end the adjustment mode. In this case, it is erased from the work RAM 164.

  If the adjustment mode is not in effect, a negative determination is made in step S1101, the adjustment mode start processing in steps S1102 to S1105 is executed, and if the adjustment mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, The adjustment mode end processing in steps S1106 to S1110 is executed.

  In the adjustment mode start process, first, in step S1102, it is determined whether or not an operation for setting the adjustment mode has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the adjustment mode switching button 205 is operated. If it is not operated, the angle adjustment process is terminated as it is. If it has been operated, in step S1103, it is determined whether or not the symbols are displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 based on the information stored in the work RAM 164. In step S1104, based on the information stored in the work RAM 164, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

  If it is either during the symbol variation display or the big hit state, the angle adjustment processing is terminated as it is. If neither the symbol variation display nor the big hit state is in effect, after the adjustment display setting process is executed in step S1105, the angle adjustment process is terminated. In the adjustment display setting process, an image that allows the player to easily set the state of the symbol display unit 201 while viewing the display area of the symbol display unit 201 is displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81. It is a process to do.

  In the adjustment mode end process, first, in step S1106, it is determined whether or not a change start command has been input. In step S1107, whether or not a setting completion operation has been performed, specifically, adjustment mode switching is performed. It is determined whether or not the button 205 is operated. If no change start command has been input and no setting completion operation has been performed, the process advances to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined whether or not an angle change operation has been performed, specifically, whether or not the angle change button 206 has been operated. If the angle change button 206 has not been operated, the angle adjustment process is terminated. If the angle change button 206 has been operated, the angle change process is executed in step S1109, and then the angle adjustment process ends.

  In the angle change process, based on the detection results of the angle detection sensors 123 to 125, it is determined which of the first setting inclination state, the second setting inclination state, and the third setting inclination state is set. Then, the type of the drive signal output for switching the state based on the grasped result and the output duration of the drive signal are specified. These pieces of information are stored in advance in the program ROM 163 in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the current state of the symbol display unit 201 and the switching destination state.

  The drive signal specified in the angle change process is output to the angle change motor 117 in a display timer interrupt process that is executed by interrupting the normal display process periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). Moreover, the output is performed over the output continuation period specified in the angle change process for special reach. The order of changing the angle is arbitrary. For example, the first setting inclination state → the second setting inclination state → the third setting inclination state → the first setting inclination state →... .

  On the other hand, if a change start command has been input or if a setting completion operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1110, and after executing the adjustment mode canceling process, the angle adjustment process is terminated. In the cancellation process of the adjustment mode, information for specifying the adjustment mode is deleted from the work RAM 164 and a process for canceling the adjustment display is executed. In this case, the state of the symbol display unit 201 is held in a state that is currently set among the first setting inclination state, the second setting inclination state, and the third setting inclination state. When the change start command has been input, the angle adjustment process is terminated regardless of whether the setting completion operation has been performed, so that the symbol change display is performed rather than the state setting of the symbol display unit 201. Can be prioritized.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the orientation of the display area composed of the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 can be adjusted according to the height position of the player's eyes, and the large display area. It becomes possible to exert the effect of achieving the above without depending on the height position of the player's eyes.

  In the present embodiment, the angle setting operation device 204 may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 or on the back surface portion. In this case, the orientation of the display area composed of the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 can be adjusted according to the height of the chair on the game hall side. Further, the buttons 205 and 206 in the angle setting operation device 204 may be used as production buttons.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this different configuration will be described. FIG. 37A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 211 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 37B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display device 212 of the symbol display unit 211. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the symbol display unit 211 includes a symbol display device 212, an upper reflection unit 213 provided above the symbol display device 212, and a lower portion provided below the symbol display device 212. Side reflection unit 214. In the symbol display device 212, the upper reflection unit 213, and the lower reflection unit 214, the display surface 212a of the symbol display device 212 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33, and the reflection surface 213a of the upper reflection unit 213 is. Are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and the reflection surface 214a of the lower reflection unit 214 is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the upper edge of the display surface 212a of the symbol display device 212 and the lower edge of the upper reflection unit 213 are in contact with or close to each other, and the lower edge of the display surface 212a and the upper edge of the lower reflection unit 214 are in contact with each other. Or it is provided so that it may adjoin. When the opening 33a is viewed from the front, the upper reflection unit 213 is formed so that the entire display surface 212a is reflected on the entire reflection surface 213a of the upper reflection unit 213, and the lower reflection is performed. The lower reflection unit 214 is formed so that the entire display surface 212a is displayed on the entire reflection surface 214a of the unit 214.

  Unlike the symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, the symbol display device 212 is provided so that a triple view display can be performed as a multi-view display. That is, as shown in FIG. 37B, the symbol display device 212 includes a liquid crystal display unit 215, a backlight 216, and a parallax barrier panel 217, and the entire display surface 212a is a viewing angle adjustment region. Thus, triple view display is performed on the entire display surface 212a. In addition, although the symbol display apparatus 212 is also provided with a pair of polarizing film, in FIG.37 (b), these polarizing films are abbreviate | omitted and shown.

  In the display control for the liquid crystal display unit 215, horizontal line regions arranged in a row in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display unit 215 are set one pixel in the vertical direction, and each horizontal line region arranged in the vertical direction has a triple view. When the display is performed, the upper display area (first display area) 218, the center display area (second display area) 219, and the lower display area (third display area) 220 are allocated. These areas 218 to 220 are arranged in the order of the upper display area 218 → the lower display area 220 → the central display area 219 → the upper display area 218 → the lower display area 220 → the central display area 219 →... Therefore, it is set to be arranged in units of one pixel.

  A parallax barrier panel 217 is provided so as to correspond to the display control of the liquid crystal display unit 215 so that each of the areas 218 to 220 is set. That is, in the parallax barrier panel 217, as with the parallax barrier panel 93 in the first embodiment, the light shielding material is deposited on the colorless and transparent glass plate 221, so that a large number of light shielding layers 222 are vertically arranged. In addition to being formed at equal intervals in the direction, a light-transmitting layer 223 is formed between the light-shielding layers 222.

  Each of the light shielding layers 222 and the transmissive layers 223 is not visible when an image displayed in the upper display region is viewed from the front of the display surface 212 a, and the upper reflection unit 213 and the lower reflection unit 214 are not visible. Of these, the upper reflection unit 213 is formed so as to be projected only on the reflection surface 213a. In addition, the image displayed in the central display area 219 is visible when the display surface 212a is viewed from the front, and is not displayed in either the upper reflection unit 213 or the lower reflection unit 214. Is formed. Further, the image displayed in the lower display area 220 is not visible when the display surface 212a is viewed from the front, and the lower reflection unit of the upper reflection unit 213 and the lower reflection unit 214 is not visible. It is formed so as to be projected only on the reflecting surface 214a of 214.

  According to the symbol display unit 211 configured as described above, although the resolution and brightness of the image are lower than in the dual view display, the image is reflected on each of the reflection surface 213a of the upper reflection unit 213 and the reflection surface 214a of the lower reflection unit 214. Therefore, the display area that is visually recognized by the player can be extended to the upper side and the lower side across the display surface 212a, and the display area can be further increased in size.

  The symbol display unit 211 is not limited to a non-movable type, and may be a movable type. In the case of a movable type, the inclination angle of each reflecting surface 213a, 214a may be changed in a plurality of stages. .

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this different configuration will be described. FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 231 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 38B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display device 232 of the symbol display unit 231. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the symbol display unit 231 includes a symbol display device 232, an upper reflection unit 233 provided above the symbol display device 232, and a lower portion provided below the symbol display device 232. Side reflection unit 234. In the symbol display device 232, the upper reflection unit 233, and the lower reflection unit 234, the display surface 232a of the symbol display device 232 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33, and the reflection surface 233a of the upper reflection unit 233 is. Are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflection surface 234a of the lower reflection unit 234 is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the upper edge of the display surface 232a of the symbol display device 232 and the lower edge of the upper reflection unit 233 are in contact with or close to each other, and the lower edge of the display surface 232a and the upper edge of the lower reflection unit 234 are in contact with each other. Or it is provided so that it may adjoin. When the opening 33a is viewed from the front, the upper reflection unit 233 is formed so that the upper half of the display surface 232a is projected on the entire reflection surface 233a of the upper reflection unit 233. The lower reflection unit 234 is formed so that the lower half of the display surface 232a is projected on the entire reflection surface 234a of the reflection unit 234.

  Similar to the symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, the symbol display device 232 is provided so that dual view display can be performed as multi-view display. However, the dual view display mode is different between the upper side and the lower side of the display surface 232a. That is, as shown in FIG. 38B, the symbol display device 232 includes a liquid crystal display unit 235, a backlight 236, and a parallax barrier panel 237, and the entire display surface 232a is a viewing angle adjustment region. It has become. In addition, although the symbol display apparatus 232 is also provided with a pair of polarizing film, in FIG.38 (b), these polarizing films are abbreviate | omitted and shown.

  In the display control for the liquid crystal display unit 235, horizontal line regions arranged in a row in the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display unit 235 are set one by one in the vertical direction, and a large number of horizontal line regions arranged in the vertical direction are arranged in the vertical direction. In the area above the center of the display area, when dual view display is performed, the area is assigned to the upper display area 238 and the center display area 239. The upper display area 238 and the central display area 239 are set to be alternately arranged in units of one pixel. In addition, the area below the center in the vertical direction is assigned to the center display area 239 and the lower display area 240 when performing dual view display. The central display area 239 and the lower display area 240 are set to be alternately arranged in units of one pixel.

  A parallax barrier panel 237 is provided so as to correspond to the display control of the liquid crystal display unit 235 so that each of the regions 238 to 240 is set. That is, in the parallax barrier panel 237, as with the parallax barrier panel 93 in the first embodiment, a light shielding material is deposited on the colorless and transparent glass plate 240, so that a large number of light shielding layers 242 are vertically arranged. A transmissive layer 243 that transmits light is formed between the light shielding layers 242.

  The respective light shielding layers 242 and the respective transmission layers 243 are formed so that the image displayed in the upper display area 238 is not visible when the display surface 232a is viewed from the front, and is displayed on the upper reflection unit 233. Has been. Further, the image displayed in the central display area 239 is visible when the display surface 232a is viewed from the front, and is not projected on either the upper reflection unit 233 or the lower reflection unit 234. Is formed. Further, the image displayed in the lower display area 240 is not visible when the display surface 232a is viewed from the front, and is displayed on the reflection surface 234a of the lower reflection unit 234. .

  That is, on the display surface 232a of the symbol display device 232, an upper viewing angle adjustment region 244 that performs dual view display obliquely upward and forward, and a lower viewing angle adjustment that performs dual view display obliquely downward and forward. An area 245 is set. The upper viewing angle adjustment region 244 and the lower viewing angle adjustment region 245 equally bisect the display surface 232a in the vertical direction. Reflecting units 233 and 234 are provided corresponding to the viewing angle adjustment regions 244 and 245, respectively.

  According to the symbol display unit 231 having the above-described configuration, the image is displayed on each of the reflection surface 233a of the upper reflection unit 233 and the reflection surface 234a of the lower reflection unit 234. Can be extended to the upper side and the lower side with the display surface 232a interposed therebetween, and the display area can be enlarged.

  Further, by dividing the display surface 232a into an area for performing dual view display for the upper side and an area for performing dual view display for the lower side, the symbol display device 212 can provide a triple view as in the fifth embodiment. Compared to the configuration in which display is performed, the number of pixels in the upper display region 238, the central display region 239, and the lower display region 240 per unit area can be increased, and the resolution of the image can be increased compared to triple view display. Is possible.

  The symbol display unit 231 is not limited to a non-movable type, and may be a movable type. In the case of a movable type, the inclination angle of each reflecting surface 233a, 234a may be changed in a plurality of stages. .

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this different configuration will be described. 39A and 39B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 251, and FIGS. 40A and 40B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the configuration of the symbol display device 252. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, the symbol display unit 251 includes a symbol display device 252 and a reflection unit 253, as in the first embodiment, and the symbol display device 252 and The reflection units 253 are arranged vertically so that the reflection unit 253 is on the upper side.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, the symbol display device 252 includes a liquid crystal display unit 254, a backlight 255, and a parallax barrier panel 256 in the same manner as the symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 40B, the upper half area of the display surface 257 is a viewing angle adjustment area 258 capable of performing multi-view display, specifically dual view display. A lower half area of the display surface 257 is a non-adjustment area 259 in which multi-view display is not performed. In addition, although the symbol display apparatus 252 is also provided with a pair of polarizing film, in FIG. 40 (a), these polarizing films are abbreviate | omitted and shown.

  In the viewing angle adjustment region 258 in the liquid crystal display unit 254, display control is performed so that the upper display region 260 and the lower display region 261 are alternately arranged in units of one pixel in the vertical direction during multi-view display. The parallax barrier panel 256 is formed such that an image displayed in the upper display area 260 can be viewed from the upper side and an image displayed in the lower display area 261 can be viewed from the lower side. On the other hand, in the non-adjustment area 259 in the liquid crystal display unit 254, display control is not performed so as to divide into the upper display area 260 and the lower display area 261 as described above, and in the parallax barrier panel 256, The light shielding layer 262 is not formed, and the whole is a transmission layer 263.

  As in the first embodiment, the symbol display unit 251 has a plurality of types for changing the size of the substantial display area visually recognized by the player through the opening 33a formed in the game board 33. Is set. However, the plurality of states include the initial state of FIG. 39A in which the display surface 257 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33 and multi-view display is not performed, and the display surface 257 is on the game board 33. In contrast, the reach inclination state shown in FIG. 39B in which multi-view display is performed by inclining 45 degrees backward is set, and the state corresponding to the big hit inclination state in the first embodiment is as follows. Not set. In addition, the big hit inclination state may be set.

  In the initial state, both the viewing angle adjustment area 258 and the non-adjustment area 259 of the display surface 257 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a. However, the reflecting surface 264 is entirely above the opening 33a and cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a.

  In the reach inclination state, as described above, the display surface 257 is inclined 45 degrees backward with respect to the game board 33, and the angle of the reflection surface 264 with respect to the display surface 257 is a right angle or a substantially right angle. Both the viewing angle adjustment area 258 and the non-adjustment area 259 of the display surface 257 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a, and the entire reflection surface 264 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a. It is possible. Here, the reflection surface 264 of the reflection unit 253 displays the entire or substantially entire viewing angle adjustment region 258 as the entire or substantially entire reflection surface 264 when the opening 33a is viewed from the front in the reach inclination state. It is provided to do. 39A and 39B, reference numeral 265 indicates a part of an angle changing mechanism having a function of holding the symbol display unit 251 in each state, and reference numeral 266 indicates a tracking mechanism of the reflection unit 253. .

  Next, normal display drawing processing and multi-view display drawing processing according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 41 and 42. The drawing process for normal display is a process executed by the VDP 165 of the display control device 82 when the symbol display unit 251 is in the initial state, as in the first embodiment. The display drawing process is a process executed by the VDP 165 of the display control device 82 when the symbol display unit 251 is in the reach inclination state, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the following description, FIG. 43 is referred to as appropriate for easy understanding. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents in the initial state, and FIG. 43B is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents in the reach inclination state.

  First, the normal display drawing process will be described.

  In the normal display drawing process, first, in step S1201, a background image drawing process for the viewing angle adjustment region 258 and the non-adjustment region 259 of the display surface 257 is executed. Specifically, the display data for the background image corresponding to the predetermined background image is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the viewing angle adjustment area 258 and the drawing area corresponding to the non-adjustment area 259 in the video RAM 167 of the display control device 82. To do. In this case, the same display data is drawn in the upper display area 260 and the lower display area 261 of the liquid crystal display unit 254 in the video RAM 167.

  In the subsequent step S1202, the drawing process of the variable display symbol for the non-adjustment area 259 on the display surface 257 is executed. Specifically, the display data of the variable display symbol corresponding to the internal command input from the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the non-adjustment area 259 in the video RAM 167 of the display control device 82.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1203, and after executing the output process of outputting the display data drawn in the video RAM 167 in steps S1201 and S1202 to the image processing device 168, the normal display drawing process is terminated.

  When the drawing process for normal display is executed, for example, the display contents when the symbol variation display is performed in the initial state of the symbol display unit 251 are as shown in FIG. In other words, the symbols are displayed in the non-adjusted area 259 of the display surface 257 using a partial area in one lane of the bowling alley as a background image.

  Since the light shielding layer 262 of the parallax barrier panel 256 is disposed in the viewing angle adjustment region 258, the resolution of the image is reduced and the luminance of the image is also reduced as compared to the non-adjustment region 259. Under such circumstances, in the initial state of the symbol display unit 251 as described above, only the background image is displayed in the viewing angle adjustment region 258, and the variation display of the symbol is performed in the non-adjustment region 259. In the region where the resolution is high and the luminance is high, the symbol variation display is performed, so that the player can see the variation display well. In the pachinko machine 10 that shifts to the jackpot state when the combination of symbols stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is a combination of jackpot symbols, the player basically pays attention to the symbols that are variably displayed as described above. It is preferable that the visibility of the variable display is good.

  Next, drawing processing for multiview display will be described.

  In the rendering process for multi-view display, first, in step S1301, a background image rendering process for the viewing angle adjustment region 258 and the non-adjustment region 259 on the display surface 257 is executed. The specific contents of this process are the same as in step S1201.

  In a subsequent step S1302, a reach symbol drawing process is performed on the non-adjustment area 259 of the display surface 257. Specifically, the reach design display data corresponding to the internal command input from the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the non-adjustment area 259 in the video RAM 167 of the display control device 82.

  In a succeeding step S1303, the rendering process of the effect image with respect to the lower display area 261 of the viewing angle adjustment area 258 on the display surface 257 is executed. Specifically, the display data of the effect image corresponding to the internal command input from the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the upper display area 260 in the video RAM 167 of the display control device 82.

  In a succeeding step S1304, the rendering process of the effect image for the lower display area 261 of the viewing angle adjustment area 258 on the display surface 257 is executed. Specifically, the display data of the effect image corresponding to the internal command input from the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the lower display area 261 in the video RAM 167 of the display control device 82.

  In the subsequent step S1305, the upside down process is executed. In the upside down process, similarly to step S1005 in the multiview display drawing process in the first embodiment, the drawing is performed in the drawing area corresponding to the lower display area 261 in each drawing area of the video RAM 167. Flip the display data upside down.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1306, and after executing the output process of outputting the display data drawn in the video RAM 167 in steps S1301 to S1305 to the image processing device 168, the drawing process for multi-view display ends.

  The display contents when the reach variation display is performed in the reach inclination state of the symbol display unit 251 by executing the drawing process for multi-view display are as shown in FIG. That is, reach variation display is performed using an image including the entire lane of one bowling alley as a background image.

  In this case, since the display area becomes larger than the initial state, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the reach variation display as the reach variation display is dynamically performed. In addition, because the combination of reach symbols is displayed in the non-adjustment area 259 with high resolution and high brightness, the player can visually recognize the combination of reach symbols, and the player can see the combination of reach symbols. Can be clearly recognized.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to multi-view display in the symbol display unit is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this different configuration will be described. 44A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 271 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 44B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a cross section taken along the line AA of FIG. 44A. FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the symbol display unit 271 in the initial state, and FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the reach inclination state of the symbol display unit 271. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the symbol display unit 271 includes a symbol display device 81 and a reflection unit 272, as in the first embodiment, and the symbol display device 81 and The reflection units 272 are arranged side by side so that the reflection unit 272 is on the upper side. In FIG. 44A, reference numeral 273 denotes a part of an angle changing mechanism having a function of holding the symbol display unit 271 in each state, and reference numeral 274 denotes a follow-up mechanism of the reflecting unit 272.

  As in the first embodiment, the symbol display unit 271 has a plurality of types for changing the size of the substantial display area visually recognized by the player through the opening 33a formed in the game board 33. Is set. However, the plurality of states include the initial state of FIG. 45A in which the display surface 94 is parallel or substantially parallel to the game board 33 and multi-view display is not performed, and the display surface 94 is on the game board 33. In contrast, the reach inclination state shown in FIG. 45 (b) in which multi-view display is performed by inclining 45 degrees backward is set, and the state corresponding to the big hit inclination state in the first embodiment is as follows. Not set. The states of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 272 in the initial state and the reach inclination state are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, the big hit inclination state may be set.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the reflection unit 272 has a box-like shape opened forward, and a unit base 276 in which an effect member (effect accessory) 275 is accommodated, A half mirror 278 provided to close the opening 277 of the unit base 276.

  The unit base 276 is formed so that the internal space becomes a wide opening toward the opening 277. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the ceiling surface 279 and the bottom surface 280 are formed so that the distance between them is increased toward the opening 277, and as shown in FIG. Similarly, the surface 281 is formed so that the distance between both faces toward the opening 277 is increased. Note that either one of the combination of the ceiling surface 279 and the bottom surface 280 or the combination of both side surfaces 281 may be formed so that the distance between the both surfaces increases toward the opening 277.

  A plurality of reflection mirrors 283 are provided in the internal space of the unit base 276. The plurality of reflecting mirrors 283 are individually provided for the ceiling surface 279, the bottom surface 280, and both side surfaces 281 of the unit base 276, and also for the back surface 282 facing the opening 277 in the unit base 276. Is provided. That is, the entire inner surface of the unit base 276 is covered with the plurality of reflection mirrors 283. An inner reflection surface 284 is formed in the internal space of the unit base 276 by the plurality of reflection mirrors 283. The inner reflection surface 284 is formed along the corresponding surfaces 279 to 282 as each reflection mirror 283 is formed in a thin plate shape. That is, the space defined by the inner reflection surface 284 is a wide opening toward the opening 277.

  The effect member 275 accommodated in the unit base 276 having the above configuration is a spherical member such as a mirror ball, and is fixed to the bottom of the unit base 276 via a fixed leg portion 285. The effect member 275 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin material and has a hollow inside. In the interior space that is a hollow space, an effect light emitting unit 286 made of a light emitting diode or the like is incorporated. The effect light emitting unit 286 is provided so that light is emitted outward from substantially the entire spherical surface of the effect member 275. The effect light emitting unit 286 is electrically connected to the display control device 82 and emits light while the light emission drive signal is input from the display control device 82.

  The opening 277 of the unit base 276 is closed by the half mirror 278 so that the effect member 275 is not exposed to the outside of the unit base 276. In the situation where the internal space of the unit base 276 on the back surface side is dark, the half mirror 278 makes the internal space invisible or difficult to view from the front surface side and emits light from the outer reflective surface 287 side which is the front surface. When done, it reflects the surrounding scenery like a mirror. Further, when light is irradiated from the inner space side of the unit base 276 on the back surface side, the light becomes visible from the front surface side, and the effect member 275 provided in the inner space is transmitted through the front surface side. It will be visible from. As the half mirror 278, any known or known one can be used as long as it exhibits the above function.

  In a situation where light is not irradiated from the effect light emitting unit 286 of the effect member 275, an image displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is displayed on the outer reflection surface 287. On the other hand, in the situation where light is emitted from the effect light emitting unit 286 of the effect member 275, the image displayed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 is displayed on the outer reflection surface 287, and the outer side from the front side. The effect member 275 can be visually recognized through the reflecting surface 287.

  In this case, as described above, the inner reflection surface 284 is formed in the internal space of the unit base 276, and the space defined by the inner reflection surface 284 becomes a wide opening toward the opening 277, that is, the half mirror 278. Yes. Therefore, the light irradiated from the surface of the production member 275 is reflected at a plurality of locations on the inner reflection surface 284 and further reflected at the back surface of the half mirror 278. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the surface of the production member 275, when the outer reflection surface 287 is seen, it is visually recognized as if there are a plurality of production members 275.

  The effect by the light of the effect member 275 is a special in which the state of the symbol display unit 271 becomes the reach inclination state and multi-view display, specifically, dual view display is performed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81. Occurs as part of reach. That is, as a special reach of reach variation display, in this embodiment, the symbol display unit 271 is in the reach inclination state and multi-view display is performed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81, but the effect by the effect member 275 The first special reach that is not performed, and the symbol display unit 271 is in the reach inclination state, the multi-view display is performed on the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81, and the effect by the effect member 275 is performed. Reach is set.

  Next, multi-view display processing executed by the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the multi-view display process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S1401, it is determined based on the information stored in the work RAM 164 whether or not the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. If the symbol variation display is not in progress, the multi-view display process is terminated.

  If the symbol change display is in progress, it is determined in step S1402 based on the information stored in the work RAM 164 whether the second special reach is in progress. Specifically, information for specifying that a special reach is generated is stored in the work RAM 164, and information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is executed for the second special reach. It is determined whether the information corresponds to the current time.

  Note that information for specifying that the second special reach is in progress, such as a second special reach flag, is stored in the work RAM 164 at the start of the second special reach, and the information is deleted at the end of the second special reach. In step S1402, it may be determined whether or not the information is stored.

  In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the first special reach is being performed based on the information stored in the work RAM 164. Specifically, information for specifying that a special reach is generated is stored in the work RAM 164, and information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is executed for the first special reach. It is determined whether the information corresponds to the current time.

  Note that information for specifying that the first special reach is in progress, such as a first special reach flag, is stored in the work RAM 164 at the start of the first special reach, and the information is deleted at the end of the first special reach. In step S1403, it may be configured to determine whether or not the information is stored.

  As a result of step S1402 and step S1403, when neither the second special reach nor the first special reach is in effect (step S1402 is NO and step S1403 is NO), the first special reach start of steps S1404 to S1407 is performed. Execute the process. If the second special reach is not in progress (NO in step S1402) and the first special reach is in progress (YES in step S1403), the second special reach start process in steps S1408 to S1410 is executed. If the second special reach is being performed (YES in step S1402), the second special reach termination process in steps S1411 to S1415 is executed.

  Hereinafter, the first special reach start process, the second special reach start process, and the second special reach end process will be individually described. First, the first special reach start process will be described.

  In the first special reach start process, first, in step S1404, it is determined whether or not the information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is the start timing of the first special reach. If it is not the start timing of the first special reach, the multi-view display process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the start timing of the first special reach, the first multi-view display state is set in step S1405. Specifically, information for specifying the first multi-view display state, such as the first multi-view display flag, is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. When the information is stored in the work RAM 164, the internal command output from the CPU 162 to the VDP 165 includes information for performing drawing for the first special reach. Thereby, in the drawing processing in the VDP 165, processing corresponding to drawing for multi-view display and processing corresponding to the first special reach is executed.

  Thereafter, the angle grasping process is executed in step S1406, and the angle changing process is executed in step S1407, and then the multiview display process is ended. The angle grasping process and the angle changing process are the same as steps S705 and S706 of the multi-view display process in the first embodiment.

  Next, the second special reach start process will be described.

  In the second special reach start process, first, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is the start timing of the second special reach. If it is not the start timing of the second special reach, the multi-view display process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the start timing of the second special reach, the second multi-view display state is set in step S1409. Specifically, information for specifying the second multi-view display state, such as a second multi-view display flag, is temporarily stored in the work RAM 164. When the information is stored in the work RAM 164, the internal command output from the CPU 162 to the VDP 165 includes information for performing drawing for the second special reach. Thereby, in the drawing process in the VDP 165, a process corresponding to the drawing for multi-view display and the process corresponding to the second special reach is executed. In step S1409, the information for identifying the first multi-view display state is deleted from the work RAM 164.

  Then, after executing the light emission effect start process in step S1410, the multi-view display process is terminated. By executing the light emission effect start process, the output of the light emission drive signal to the effect light emitting unit 286 of the reflection unit 272 is started. Thereby, the irradiation of the light from the production light emitting unit 286 is started.

  Next, the second special reach end process will be described.

  In the second special reach end process, first, in step S1411, it is determined whether or not the information on the variable display time measured by the display control device 82 is the end timing of the second special reach. If it is not the end timing of the second special reach, the multi-view display process is ended as it is.

  If it is the end timing of the second special reach, the second multi-view display state is canceled in step S1412. Specifically, the information for specifying that the second multi-view display state is stored in the work RAM 164 is deleted. When the information is deleted, the internal command output from the CPU 162 to the VDP 165 does not include information for performing drawing for multi-view display. As a result, the drawing process in the VDP 165 is executed in accordance with the drawing for normal display.

  In a succeeding step S1413, a light emission effect end process is executed. By executing the light emission effect end processing, the output of the light emission drive signal to the effect light emission unit 286 of the reflection unit 272 is stopped. Thereby, the irradiation of light from the effect light emitting unit 286 is terminated.

  Thereafter, the angle grasping process is executed in step S1414, and after the angle return process is executed in step S1415, the multiview display process is ended. The angle grasping process and the angle returning process are the same as steps S710 and S711 of the multiview display process in the first embodiment.

  Next, drawing processing executed by the VDP 165 of the display control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the drawing process according to the present embodiment, first, in step S1501, it is determined based on an internal command input from the CPU 162 of the display control device 82 whether or not it is a drawing timing. If it is not the drawing timing, the drawing process is terminated as it is. If it is the drawing timing, it is determined in step S1502 based on the internal command input from the CPU 162 whether or not it is in the first multi-view display state or the second multi-view display state.

  If neither the first multi-view display state nor the second multi-view display state is set, after the normal display drawing process is executed in step S1503, the drawing process is terminated. The drawing process for normal display is the same as step S803 of the drawing process in the first embodiment.

  If it is in the first multi-view display state or the second multi-view display state, it is determined in step S1504 whether or not it is in the second multi-view display state. If it is not in the second multi-view display state, the drawing process for the first multi-view display is executed in step S1505, and then the drawing process is terminated. The drawing process for the first multi-view display is the same as step S804 of the drawing process in the first embodiment.

  If it is in the second multi-view display state, the drawing process for the second multi-view display is executed in step S1506, and then the drawing process is terminated. In the drawing process for the second multi-view display, basically the same process as the drawing process for the first multi-view display is executed. However, in the rendering process for the second multi-view display, the video RAM 167 is set so that the image displayed on the outer reflection surface 287 of the reflection unit 272 corresponds to the light emitted from the effect light emitting unit 286. The display data is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the upper display area 102 of the. That is, as already described, the outer reflecting surface 287 of the reflecting unit 272 is configured by the half mirror 278 and the inner reflecting surface 284 is formed in the inner space of the unit base 276, so that the light emission for production is performed. In the situation where the light emitted from the unit 286 is irradiated, the image displayed on the upper display area 102 is displayed on the outer reflecting surface 287 including the image reflected on the inner reflecting surface 284 of the unit base 276. there is a possibility. On the other hand, in the drawing process for the second multi-view display, the upper side of the video RAM 167 is less affected even if it is projected on the outer reflecting surface 287 including the one reflected on the inner reflecting surface 284. The display data is drawn in the drawing area corresponding to the display area 102.

  Next, the display contents in the display area of the symbol display unit 271 including the display surface 94 and the outer reflective surface 287 will be described by taking as an example a case where symbol variation display is performed. FIG. 48A is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents in a situation where both the first special reach and the second special reach are not performed, and FIG. 48B is a situation in which the first special reach is performed. FIG. 48C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content in a situation where the second special reach is being performed.

  In a situation where neither the first special reach nor the second special reach is performed, as shown in FIG. 48A, the symbol display unit 271 is in an initial state, and the display surface 94 is parallel to the game board 33. Or it is substantially parallel. In this case, multi-view display is not performed, and symbol variation display is performed using a partial region in one lane of the bowling alley as a background image.

  In the situation where the first special reach is being performed, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the symbol display unit 271 is in a tilted state for reach, and the display surface 94 is relative to the game board 33 about its lower end. In addition to being inclined 45 degrees backward, the outer reflection surface 287 is orthogonal to the display surface 94 at the upper end of the display surface 94. In this case, multi-view display is performed, and when viewed from the player, the image reflected by the outer reflecting surface 287 is displayed at a position where the display surface 94 is extended upward on the same plane. As seen. In this state, reach variation display is performed using an image including the entire lane of one bowling alley as a background image. As a result, the display area for performing the reach variation display is enlarged, and the reach variation display can be increased as the reach variation display is dynamically performed.

  In the situation where the second special reach is performed, as shown in FIG. 48C, the symbol display unit 271 is in the reach inclination state as in the first special reach, and the multi-view display is performed on the display surface 94. It has been broken. In addition, light is emitted from the production member 275 of the reflection unit 272, and the emitted light is reflected directly or at a plurality of locations on the inner reflection surface 284 in the unit base 276, and then the half mirror 278. The outer reflection surface 287 is transmitted. On the display surface 94, multi-view display is performed so that an image corresponding to the irradiation of light from the effect member 275 is displayed on the outer reflection surface 287. In this case, an image similar to the first special reach is displayed on the display surface 94 side in the display area. Further, on the outer reflection surface 287 side, a plurality of performance members 275 are visually recognized and an image corresponding thereto is displayed. In this state, reach variation display is performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects in the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  An outer reflecting surface 287 that constitutes a display area together with the display surface 94 in the tilted state for reach is formed by a half mirror 278, and an effect member 275 in which an effect light emitting unit 286 is incorporated is provided behind the half mirror 278. It was. When the light is not emitted from the effect light emitting unit 286, the effect member 275 is not visible, and when the light is emitted from the effect light emitting unit 286, the effect member 275 is visible through the half mirror 278. The configuration is as follows. This makes it possible to produce an effect using the effect member 275 using a configuration for enlarging the display area.

  In particular, in this configuration, by switching between the start and stop of the light irradiation from the effect light emitting unit 286, the effect member 275 as an object is superimposed on the display in the display area, and the effect member It is possible to switch to a state where 275 is not visible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control related to the start and stop switching of the effect using the effect member 275.

  By providing the unit base 276 on the back side of the half mirror 278 and accommodating the effect member 275 in the unit base 276, when light is emitted from the effect light emitting unit 286, the pachinko machine is passed through the half mirror 278. 10 An area that is visible from the front can be defined in the internal space of the unit base 276 including the effect member 275. Further, since the unit base 276 is integrated with the half mirror 278, the effect member 275 moves in accordance with the movement of the half mirror 278, and the two can be linked well.

  The unit base 276 is provided with a reflection mirror 283 so as to cover the entire inner peripheral surface. Specifically, the reflection mirror 283 is provided on the back surface 282 facing the half mirror 278 in the unit base 276. In addition, reflection mirrors 283 are provided on the ceiling surface 279, the bottom surface 280, and both side surfaces 281. The space defined by the inner reflection surface 284 of each reflection mirror 283 has a wide opening toward the half mirror 278. Therefore, when light is emitted from the effect light emitting unit 286, the image of the effect member 275 is reflected between the half mirror 278 and the inner reflection surface 284, or between the inner reflection surfaces 284, and the player has a plurality of effects. It can be visually recognized as if the working member 275 is present. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the production using the production member 275 while suppressing the number of production members 275.

  When the first special reach is started, the state of the variable display unit 271 is changed from the initial state to the reach inclination state, and when the second special reach is subsequently started, the reach inclination state is maintained. Then, irradiation of light from the light emitting unit for production 286 is started. In other words, the size of the display area is changed in accordance with the state of the variable display of the symbol, and the effect using the effect member 275 is performed. Therefore, the state of the display region corresponding to the state of the variable display of the symbol is changed. Switching can be performed in a plurality of stages, and each of these stages is performed with different visual effects. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the performance by the performance member 275 is performed is not limited to the above, for example, in addition to or instead of occurring during the reach variation display, It is good also as a structure which generate | occur | produces inside. Further, when the symbol display unit 271 is in the initial state, the outer reflective surface 287 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening 33a of the game board 33, and the effect member 275 in the initial state of the symbol display unit 271. It is good also as a structure by which production by is performed. Further, the symbol display unit 271 may be configured to be fixed in an inclined state such as a reach inclination state, and an effect may be provided by the effect member 275 even if the symbol variation display is not in the reach variation display. Further, in the second special reach, the multi-view display is not performed so that the image is not projected on the outer reflection surface 287.

  Further, the shape of the effect member 275 is not limited to a spherical shape and is arbitrary. Further, the reflection mirror 283 may not be provided on the unit base 276, and a plurality of effect members 275 may be provided on the unit base 276. Further, the reflection mirror 283 is not provided on the entire inner peripheral surface of the unit base 276, but the reflection mirror 283 may be provided only on the back surface 282, for example. In addition, the space defined by the inner reflection surface 284 of each reflection mirror 283 does not have to be a wide opening toward the half mirror 278, and the opposing surfaces of the inner reflection surface 284 are parallel or substantially parallel. Also good.

  In addition, it is not essential that the production light-emitting portion 286 is incorporated in the production member 275. For example, the wall portion of the unit base 276 can be illuminated so that the internal space of the unit base 276 can be illuminated. An effect light emitting unit 286 may be provided. Further, the production member 275 is not integrated with the half mirror 278, and the production member 275 is positioned behind the half mirror 278 when the symbol display unit 271 is arranged in the reach inclination state. It may be configured. In addition, the light emitting unit for production 286 is not provided inside the unit base 276, but is disposed in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the unit base 276, and emits light from the position toward the half mirror 278. Also good.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the symbol display device is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, this different configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 49A to 49C are explanatory views for explaining the symbol display device 291 in the present embodiment.

  As illustrated in FIG. 49A, the symbol display device 291 includes an image liquid crystal display unit 292 and a backlight 293, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294 instead of the parallax barrier panel 93. It has. The parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294 is provided in front of the image liquid crystal display unit 292 so as to face the entire image liquid crystal display unit 292.

  The symbol display device 291 includes a first image processing device (display image processing means) 295 that drives the image liquid crystal display unit 292 and a second image processing device (shading image processing for driving the parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294). Means) 296. By controlling the first image processing device 295 by the display control device 82, a predetermined image is displayed on the image liquid crystal display unit 292. By controlling the second image processing device 296 by the display control device 82, either the state in which the light shielding layer 297 is displayed or the state in which the light shielding layer 297 is not displayed in the parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294 is set. The

  As shown in FIG. 49B, the display control device 82 is in the initial state of the symbol display unit 38, and in the situation where the multi-view display is not performed in the symbol display device 291, the light shielding layer 297 in the parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294. Is not displayed. In the state where the light shielding layer 297 is provided, the resolution and brightness of the image are lower than in the state where the light shielding layer 297 is not provided. Therefore, in a situation where multi-view display is not performed, the parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294 is provided. By not displaying the light shielding layer 297, it is possible to prevent the resolution and brightness of the image in the initial state from being lowered.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the symbol display unit is in the reach inclination state (or the big hit inclination state), the display control device 82 includes the light shielding layer 297 in the parallax barrier liquid crystal display unit 294. To be displayed. Thereby, similarly to the first embodiment, multi-view display (dual view display) can be performed in the reach inclination state.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is necessary to control the parallax barrier as compared with the first embodiment, but it is possible to perform multi-view display but does not need to perform multi-view display. The resolution and brightness of the image can be increased as compared with the first embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the multi-view display in the symbol display device is different from the above-described embodiments. Therefore, the different configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. 50A to 50C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the configuration of the symbol display device 301 in the present embodiment. In addition, although the symbol display apparatus 301 is also provided with a pair of polarizing film, in FIG.50 (b) and FIG.50 (c), these polarizing films are abbreviate | omitted and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, in a situation where multi-view display (specifically, dual view display) is performed in display control for the liquid crystal display unit 302 of the symbol display device 301, each unit pixel region 303 is displayed on the upper side. The area 304 and the lower display area 305 are allocated. In this case, in the symbol display device in each of the above embodiments, a large number of horizontal line areas arranged in a line in the horizontal direction are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, and when the horizontal line area performs dual view display, the upper display area and the lower display area are arranged. The horizontal line area is not set in the symbol display device 301 in this embodiment, but the upper display area 304 and the lower display area 305 are one pixel in both the vertical line and the horizontal line. It is set so as to be arranged alternately in units. In other words, the upper, lower, left, and right unit pixel areas 303 with respect to the arbitrary upper display area 304 are set as the lower display area 305 and the upper, lower, left, and right unit pixel areas 303 with respect to the arbitrary lower display area 305. Is set in the upper display area 304.

  In addition, the parallax barrier panel 306 of the symbol display device 301 includes a light shielding layer 307 and a transmission layer 308 corresponding to the display control of the liquid crystal display unit 302 as described above. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50B and 50C, the light shielding layer 307 and the transmissive layer 308 corresponding to the size of the unit pixel region 303 of the liquid crystal display unit 302 are provided in both the vertical line and the horizontal line. It is formed so that it may line up alternately. In other words, the transmissive layer 308 is provided in the upper, lower, left and right regions of the arbitrary light shielding layer 307, and the light shielding layer 307 is provided in the upper, lower, left and right regions of the arbitrary transmissive layer 308.

  In the configuration in which the upper display area 102 and the lower display area 103 are alternately arranged for each horizontal line area as in the above embodiments, for example, when attention is paid to the upper display area 102, one upper A blank having a width dimension corresponding to the vertical dimension of the unit pixel area 101 exists between the display area 102 and the adjacent upper display area 102. Then, since the blank exists as a horizontal line in the image of the upper display area 102, there is a concern that the blank will be conspicuous.

  On the other hand, since the upper display area 304 and the lower display area 305 are alternately arranged in units of one pixel in both the vertical line and the horizontal line as in the present symbol display device 301, the above-mentioned The blank does not exist as a line but as a point of one pixel unit. Then, the blank becomes inconspicuous and the resolution can be increased in a pseudo manner.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the characteristic configurations in the above embodiments may be applied to each other in a predetermined combination. In addition, each characteristic configuration of the following different forms may be applied individually to each characteristic configuration in each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. Furthermore, the characteristic configurations of the above embodiments and the following different embodiments may be applied to each other in a predetermined combination.

  (1) Another pattern of the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 in the symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is 90 degrees, and FIG. 51B is an angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131. FIG. 51C is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflecting surface 131 is an obtuse angle.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, in each of the above embodiments, the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is set to 90 degrees. In this case, the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player is such that the display surface 94 extends upward on the same plane.

  In FIG. 51B, the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is set to an acute angle. In this case, the display area that the player can visually recognize is the display area on the reflective surface 131 side of the display area on the display surface 94 side folded at the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the boundary between them as a bent line. It becomes a state.

  In FIG. 51C, the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is set to an obtuse angle. In this case, the display area that the player can visually recognize is that the display area on the reflective surface 131 side is folded toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 with the boundary between the two as a bent line with respect to the display area on the display surface 94 side. It becomes a state.

  As described above, when the angle between the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 is as shown in FIGS. 51B and 51C, the display area can be enlarged, and It is possible to form a display area that is bent at an intermediate position while using one symbol display device 81.

  (2) A modification of the configuration related to the multi-view display of the symbol display device 311 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol display device 311 includes a liquid crystal display unit 312, a backlight 313, and a parallax barrier panel 314, similar to the symbol display device in the first embodiment. The liquid crystal display unit 312 is controlled so that the upper display area 315 and the lower display area 316 are set, and the parallax barrier panel 314 is associated with the upper display area 315 and the lower display area 316. By being provided, it is possible to perform multi-view display, specifically dual view display, in the vertical direction. In addition, although the symbol display apparatus 311 is also provided with a pair of polarizing film, in FIG. 52, these polarizing films are abbreviate | omitted and shown.

  In this case, the symbol display device 311 adjusts luminance between the liquid crystal display unit 312 and the backlight 313 (specifically, between the liquid crystal display unit 312 and the rear polarizing film) as a luminance adjustment unit. Panel 317 is provided. The brightness adjustment panel 317 uses a colorless and transparent synthetic resin sheet as a base material, and a part of the light directed to the lower display region 316 is placed on the lower side of the liquid crystal display unit 312 at a portion facing the lower display region 316. A diffusion layer 318 for diffusing into the upper display region 315 adjacent to the display region 316 is formed. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted to the upper display area 315 as compared with the lower display area 316, and to increase the luminance of the image displayed in the upper display area 315 as compared to the lower display area 316. Is possible.

  In the first embodiment and the like, the image displayed in the lower display area 316 is directly visible on the display surface of the symbol display device 311 whereas the image displayed in the upper display area 315 is reflected. The image is projected on the reflection surface 131 of the unit 84, and the brightness of the image is reduced during the reflection. In this case, the brightness of the image displayed in the upper display area 315 is made higher than the brightness of the image displayed in the lower display area 316 as described above, so that the brightness is not adjusted in the parallax barrier panel 314. However, it is possible to make the luminance of the image of the upper display area 315 displayed on the reflection surface 131 equal to the luminance of the image of the lower display area 316 displayed on the display surface.

  Note that the target for increasing the amount of light emitted by the brightness adjustment panel 317 is not limited to the upper display area 315, and an image displayed in the lower display area 316 instead of the upper display area 315 is displayed. In the configuration where the light is reflected on the reflecting surface, the luminance adjustment panel 317 may be provided so that the amount of light applied to the lower display region 316 is larger than the amount of light applied to the upper display region 315. Good.

  That is, when the display area of the symbol display unit is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint, the luminance of the image that is visible by being reflected by the reflecting surface is the same as the luminance of the image that is visible on the display surface, or In order to be substantially the same, on the display surface, the display area for reflection that will be visually recognized by the player after being reflected by the reflective surface, and directly visible to the player without being reflected by the reflective surface The amount of light given to the reflective display area can be reduced by dispersing a part of the light emitted from the light source toward the non-reflective display area to the reflective display area. It is only necessary to provide means for adjusting the luminance that is larger than the amount of light given to the non-reflective display area.

  (3) A modification of the symbol display unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration when the symbol display unit 321 according to this embodiment is viewed from the side, and FIG. 53B is a configuration when the symbol display unit 321 is viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the symbol display unit 321 includes a symbol display device 322 and a reflection unit 323. The symbol display device 322 is provided such that the display surface 324 is inclined upward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. In the symbol display device 322, the upper side of the display surface 324 is set as a viewing angle adjustment region 325 that enables dual view display, and the lower side is set as a non-adjustment region 326 that does not perform dual view display. Yes. The viewing angle adjustment region 325 is provided so as to perform dual view display in the vertical direction of the display surface 324.

  The reflection unit 323 is provided such that the reflection surface 327 is inclined downward toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 at a position spaced apart from the symbol display device 322 by a predetermined distance. The reflection unit 323 is provided so that the angle of the reflection surface 327 with respect to the display surface 324 is a right angle or a substantially right angle, and the entire reflection surface 327 is visible when the symbol display unit 321 is viewed from the front. It is provided so as to project the entire angle adjustment area 325.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 53B, the movable accessory 328 is provided so as to be positioned between the reflection surface 327 and the display surface 324 when viewed from the front. The movable accessory 328 is provided in a horizontally long plate shape, and closes the gap between the reflection surface 327 and the display surface 324 when viewed from the front. Moreover, it is provided so that rotation is possible with the left-right direction as a rotation axis, and predetermined characters or patterns are attached to each plate surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 53A, the movable accessory 328 is provided at a position that does not block the light path between the reflection surface 327 and the viewing angle adjustment region 325.

  According to this configuration, the display areas in the symbol display unit 321 exist above and below the movable accessory 328, respectively. In this case, it is possible to display an image at an upper and lower position with the movable accessory 328 sandwiched between them only by using a single symbol display device 322 while increasing the size of the display area.

  (4) FIG. 54 shows a modified example of the configuration of the symbol display device 252 in the seventh embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the symbol display device 252 is provided with a first backlight 331 and a second backlight 332 corresponding to the viewing angle adjustment region 258 and the non-adjustment region 259, respectively. In addition, the symbol display device 252 includes a first light source drive unit 333 that drives the first backlight 331 based on a drive signal output from the display control device 82, and a drive signal output from the display control device 82. And a second light source driving unit 334 that drives the second backlight 332.

  According to this configuration, the amount of light applied to the region corresponding to the viewing angle adjustment region 258 in the liquid crystal display unit 254 is different from the amount of light applied to the region corresponding to the non-adjustment region 259 in the liquid crystal display unit 254. It becomes possible. Then, by setting the amount of light emitted from the first backlight 331 to be larger than the amount of light emitted from the second backlight 332, the luminance of the image displayed in the viewing angle adjustment region 258 and the non-adjustment region 259 are set. It is possible to make the brightness of the displayed image comparable.

  In this configuration, at least one of the light amount emitted from the first backlight 331 and the light amount emitted from the second backlight 332 is changed between the initial state and the inclined state of the symbol display unit 251. It is good.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, when the display area is constituted by both the display surface and the reflection surface, the reflection surface is arranged above the display surface. It is good also as a structure by which the surface is arrange | positioned below. In this case, the symbol display device is arranged so that the display surface is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the reflection unit is arranged so that the reflective surface is inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the display area substantially visually recognized by the player is inclined downward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the display surface and the reflective surface are arrange | positioned at right and left. In this case, the display surface and the reflective surface are positioned on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the display surface and the reflective surface are positioned on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 so that the sides far from each other are positioned on the front side. By tilting in the front-rear direction, the display area that is substantially visually recognized by the player is tilted so as to be located closer to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 from one side to the other side of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, the multi-view display is performed using the parallax barrier panel, but the multi-view display may be performed using a prism or a lenticular lens. The image display unit for displaying an image is not limited to the liquid crystal display unit, and an organic EL display unit, a CRT, or the like may be used. The images displayed on these image display units are not limited to moving images, and may be still images.

  Further, instead of the image display unit, a decorative sheet in which a picture such as a pattern or a character is written on the front surface may be used. In this case, the decorative sheet is formed of glass or a synthetic resin material so as to have light transmissivity, and the picture to be written on the surface of the decorative sheet is such that the upper display picture and the lower display picture are in the vertical direction. The state is divided and arranged alternately. Then, a parallax barrier panel is provided corresponding to the upper display picture and the lower display picture, and a backlight for irradiating light is provided on the back surface of the decorative sheet. As a result, dual view display using a decorative sheet can be performed. Further, instead of the parallax barrier panel, a panel provided with a light shielding layer with a mechanical structure may be used.

  (7) In the first embodiment, in the variable display unit 38 having the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84, the angle changing motor 117 is provided to change the angle of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81. In addition, the reflection unit 84 can follow the change in the angle of the display surface 94 so that the reflection surface 131 follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are not limited thereto. In the state where the display area is configured, the symbol display device 81 and the reflection unit 84 may be provided in a non-movable manner. Note that this configuration may be applied to other than the first embodiment, such as the second embodiment or the third embodiment.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the angle of the display surface 94 in the reach inclination state may be an angle other than 45 degrees. Further, the angle of the display surface 94 in the big hitting inclination state may be an angle other than 35 degrees. In addition, instead of the reach inclination state and the jackpot inclination state, the first inclination state and the second inclination state are set, and the change between the first inclination state and the second inclination state is being displayed in the symbol variation display. You may make it carry out. In addition, one of the first inclined state and the second inclined state is switched during the symbol variation display, and the other of the first inclined state and the second inclined state is the symbol variation display such as an error notification. It is good also as a structure switched, when notifying the state of the unrelated pachinko machine 10. The initial state may be a state in which the display surface 94 is slightly inclined in the front-rear direction.

  (9) The tilt state may be set not in two steps but in three steps or four or more steps, or only one step. In the configuration in which the tilt state is set only in one stage, the tilt state may be switched according to the state of the symbol variation display, and the pachinko machine 10 that is not related to the symbol variation display such as error notification may be used. It is good also as a structure switched when notifying of a state. Alternatively, the initial state may be omitted, and only the inclined state may be set. Further, the tilt state is not held in stages, but may be held in any state from the initial state to a predetermined tilt limit state. Note that this configuration may be applied to other than the first embodiment, such as the second embodiment or the third embodiment.

  (10) In the first embodiment, when the opening 33 a of the game board 33 is viewed from the front, it is an image displayed in the upper display area 102 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 and is displayed on the reflection surface 131. The parallax barrier panel 93 so that the brightness of the image and the image displayed in the lower display area 103 of the liquid crystal display unit 90 and viewed in the viewing angle adjustment area 97 of the display surface 94 are approximately the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the parallax barrier panel 93 may be provided so as to increase the luminance of either one. Note that this configuration may be applied to other than the first embodiment, such as the second embodiment or the third embodiment.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, both the display surface and the reflecting surface are inclined in the front-rear direction in the inclined state such as the reach inclined state and the big hit inclined state, but the game is started from a predetermined position in front of the pachinko machine 10. If each display of the multi-view display on the display surface becomes visible on each of the display surface and the reflection surface when viewing the opening 33a of the board 33, one of the display surface or the reflection surface is inclined in the front-rear direction. It is good also as a structure which is not carried out. In the first embodiment, the entire display surface 94 may be the viewing angle adjustment region 97. However, since the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 is smaller than the display surface 94, even if multi-view display is performed in the viewing angle adjustment region 97, only a part of the image directed upward from the display surface 94 is displayed. Is reflected on the reflecting surface 131.

  (12) In the first embodiment and the like, the position of the angle change motor 117 and the configuration of drive control of the angle change motor 117 by the display control device 82 are arbitrary. Moreover, you may provide the angle change motor 117 separately with respect to the symbol display apparatus 81 and the reflection unit 84, respectively. Alternatively, the angle detection sensors 123 to 125 may be omitted, and a stepping motor having a rotary encoder may be used as the angle changing motor 117 instead.

  (13) In the first embodiment or the like, when the state of the variable display unit is switched between the initial state and the tilted state, a door member that makes the rear side of the opening 33a of the game board 33 invisible ( A shielding member) may be provided. In this case, for example, when the size of the display area is expanded such as switching from the initial state to the reach inclination state, the switching process can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player. Then, when viewed from the player, the display area is suddenly expanded, and the visual effect given to the player can be enhanced when the display area is expanded as an effect.

  (14) In the above embodiments, in the case of a configuration in which only an image having the same shape is displayed even if it is inverted upside down in the upper display area of the liquid crystal display unit, for multi-view display in the VDP 165 of the display control device 82 In this drawing process, the upside down process may not be executed. In the configuration in which the display data of the image displayed in the upper display area of the liquid crystal display unit and the display data of the image displayed in the lower display area are stored independently in the character ROM 166 or the like, Of the display data of the image displayed in the upper display area, the display data for multi-view display is stored in the character ROM 166 or the like in a vertically inverted state in advance so that the drawing process for multi-view display can be used. It is good also as a structure which does not perform an upside down process.

  (15) In the first embodiment, in the drawing process for normal display in the VDP 165 of the display control device 82 (FIG. 27), the unified drawing process is executed. However, this may be changed. For example, instead of executing the unified drawing process, instead of displaying an image shifted by one pixel in the adjacent upper display area 102 and lower display area 103 in the liquid crystal display unit 90, the display surface 94 is displayed. It is good also as a structure which displays a single image. Note that this configuration may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  (16) In the first embodiment, the following processing configuration may be applied when setting display data in each of the drawing areas 171 to 174 of the video RAM 167. That is, in each drawing area 171-174, an address is set for each unit pixel area 101 in the liquid crystal display unit 90, and an address is also set for display data stored in the character ROM 166 of the display control device 82. When the display data is set in each of the drawing areas 171 to 174, the same subroutine is activated. In this case, in this subroutine, the start address and end address of the drawing areas 171 to 174 to be set for display data are input to the start address specifying area and the end address specifying area. The unit display data of the corresponding address in the display data is set for each address of the drawing areas 171 to 174. With this configuration, display data can be set for each of the drawing areas 171 to 174 through a common subroutine.

  In addition, in the upside down process in the drawing process for multi-view display (FIG. 29), the display data address is set while being added in the normal drawing process, while the display data address is set while being subtracted. Thus, it is possible to set an image that is inverted upside down in the same subroutine.

  (17) In the configuration in which the window panel 62 is arranged to be inclined upward toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and when a general player plays a game, the window panel 62 is looked down. When performing multi-view display on the symbol display device 81, it is not essential that at least one of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 or the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 is inclined in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. . For example, one of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 rises in the vertical direction, and the other is laid in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which will be in the state inclined to the back side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Note that this configuration may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments, when a general player plays a game, even in a configuration in which the window panel 62 is looked down, when performing multi-view display on the symbol display device 81, It is not essential that at least one of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 or the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 is inclined in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. For example, one of the display surface 94 of the symbol display device 81 and the reflection surface 131 of the reflection unit 84 may be configured to stand in the vertical direction and the other to be laid in the horizontal direction. In this configuration, both the display surface 94 and the reflection surface 131 are not inclined in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 and are not inclined with respect to the window panel 62 in multi-view display. . Note that this configuration may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device is integrated with the symbol display device. However, the position of the display control device is arbitrary, for example, the display control device on the back of the game board 33. May be fixed.

  (19) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 66 based on the command output from the main control device 65. Instead, the main control device is used. The display control device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 66 based on the command output from 65. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 66 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the control devices 66 and 82 may be provided as one control device.

  The configuration of commands output from the main control device 65 to the sound emission control device 66 is also arbitrary. For example, the variation start command includes information such as the variation display time of the symbol, the presence / absence of jackpot occurrence, but does not include the information on the symbol type to be stopped and displayed. The type command including information may be output from the main control device 65 to the sound emission control device 66 separately from the change start command. Further, a stop command or a confirmation command may be output from the main control device 65 to the sound emission control device 66 when the symbol variation display is stopped.

  In addition, when the voice light emission control device 66 receives a command from the main control device 65, the voice light emission control device 66 does not output the command to the display control device 82 as it is, but the voice light emission control device 66 displays a pattern variation display pattern or the like. While specifying, it is good also as a structure which outputs the information including the specific result to the display control apparatus 82. FIG. Therefore, it is good also as a structure by which the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 66 specifies whether special reach is performed.

  (20) In the first embodiment, the symbol display unit 38 is switched from the initial state to the reach inclination state when a special reach occurs in variable symbol display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in one variation display time for a single game ball winning in the operating port 36, the start of the symbol variation display and the stop of the symbol variation display are performed a predetermined number of times. In a game machine in which a pseudo continuous variation effect that is repeatedly performed and a reach variation display is generated in the last symbol variation display is set, the symbol display unit 38 when the pseudo continuous variation effect is started or in the middle thereof. May be switched from the initial state to the reach inclination state. In addition, after the combination of normal jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, fluctuations and the like are performed again, and finally the combination of symbols for probability variation jackpots is stopped and displayed. It is good also as a structure switched to the inclination state for use.

  (21) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 65 is configured to determine a part of the display of the symbol variation on the symbol display device 81. Instead of this, the main control device 65 has a jackpot state. Only the presence / absence of occurrence and the symbol variation display time may be determined, and the other variation display modes may be determined by the sound emission control device 66 or the display control device 82.

  (22) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine or a pachinko machine is combined with a slot machine, a display composed of a display surface and a reflective surface through a window or window panel formed on the front of the gaming machine. What is necessary is just to set it as the structure which provides a symbol display unit so that an area | region can be visually recognized from the game machine front. In this case, the reel (rotating body) may be provided separately from the symbol display unit, and the symbol display unit may be substituted for the reel.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Game board, 33a ... Opening part, 65 ... Main control device, 81 ... Symbol display device, 82 ... Display control device, 83 ... Display side support mechanism which comprises a holding means, 84 ... Reflection unit 85 ... Reflection side support mechanism constituting holding means, 90 ... Liquid crystal display unit, 92 ... Back light, 93 ... Parallax barrier panel, 94 ... Display surface, 95, 96 ... Non-adjustment area, 97 ... Viewing angle adjustment area, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 101 ... Unit pixel area, 102 ... Upper display area, 103 ... Lower display area, 104 ... Light shielding layer, 105 ... Transmission layer, 106 ... Transmission amount adjustment panel, 117 ... Angle change motor, 131 ... Reflection surface, 139, 140 ... guide groove, 142 ... connecting member, 152 ... CPU of main controller, 162 ... CPU of display controller, 165 ... VDP, 166 ... character ROM, 188 ... shutter member, 204 Angle setting operation device, 244 ... upper viewing angle adjustment region, 245 ... lower viewing angle adjustment region, 273 ... angle changing mechanism, 274 ... tracking mechanism, 275 ... effect member, 276 ... unit base, 278 ... half mirror, 283 ... Reflection mirror, 286 ... Production light emitting part, 287 ... Outer reflection surface, 294 ... Liquid crystal display part for parallax barrier, 296 ... Second image processing device, 331 ... First backlight, 332 ... Second backlight.

Claims (1)

A display means having a display surface and capable of differentiating the display when the display surface is viewed from the first direction and the display when the display surface is viewed from the second direction;
Reflection means having a reflection surface capable of reflecting the display on the display surface;
It has a position changing means for changing the position of at least one of the display surface and the reflecting surface, and the change range by the position changing means includes a plurality of predetermined display positions. Holding means for holding the display means and the reflecting means at each of the positions;
With
As the plurality of display positions, a display visible from the second direction on the display surface is reflected on the reflective surface so that the display surface is visible from the first direction. The reflective surface is in an inclined state, and a display that is visible from the first direction on the display surface and a display that is visible from the second direction on the display surface and reflected by the reflective surface. At least a special display position is set in which at least one of the display surface and the reflective surface is inclined in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine so that both are visible from a predetermined position in front of the gaming machine,
As the special display position, a first special display position and a second special display position in which the inclination angle of the display surface and the reflection surface in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine are different from each other are set,
The display surface and the reflection surface are both formed in a planar shape,
The holding means holds the display means and the reflecting means so that the angle of the reflecting surface with respect to the display surface is a right angle or a substantially right angle at both the first special display position and the second special display position. A gaming machine that is characterized by

Images